Fiery Command WorkStationhelp.efi.com/cws_hsij/6.4/en-us/Command_WorkStation.pdfFiery JDF workflow .....74 Submit the JDF job .....74 Display JDF column headings in Command

Fiery Command WorkStation

© 2019 Electronics For Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for thisproduct.

17 October 2019

Contents

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Fiery Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

The Command WorkStation workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Fiery Smart Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Job Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Adding and connecting a Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Access levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Connecting to a Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Add and connect to a Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Search for an available Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Log off the Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

View another Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

The Servers list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Customizing Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Set Command WorkStation preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Manage Job Center columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Change the column display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Adjust the width of a column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Expand or collapse panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Customize the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Job Center toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Configuring Fiery server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Access Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Access Configure from Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Access Configure from WebTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Locate Help and other information about Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Exit Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

View, save, or print server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

View server configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Save the server configuration as a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


Contents

3

Print the server configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Create new users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Add users to existing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remove users from groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Change user attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Change group privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Delete users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

About backing up and restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Back up or restore Fiery server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Viewing jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Viewing jobs in the Job Preview pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Fiery Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Using Fiery Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Using Version Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Creating versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Die line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Manually define a die line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Automatic die detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using XMP data for a die line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Die line printing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Import jobs for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Importing jobs into the print queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Import jobs from external archives and Fiery server hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Setting print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

View job properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Job actions in the Job Properties window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Print option categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Set defaults for all job properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Preset print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Server Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Job Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Open Job Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54


Contents

4

Editing jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Step and repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Select a substrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Print from Job Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Remove raster data from a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Determining the last printed page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Managing jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Search for jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Simple job search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Advanced job search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Viewing job thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Filter a job list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Using the Completed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Export Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Move jobs to another queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Send jobs to another Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Archive jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

First-time setup with Archive Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Archive jobs with Archive manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Understand archived jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Folders inaccessible during migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Manage archive locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Share archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Search archived jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Use archived jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Disable Archive Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Archive jobs without Archive Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Clear Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Drag and drop file management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Estimate ink usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Set cost and job columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Estimate costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Fiery JDF Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

About Fiery JDF and JMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Fiery JDF Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Enabling JDF-submitting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74


Contents

5

Fiery JDF workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Submit the JDF job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Display JDF column headings in Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Fiery JDF jobs and virtual printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Specify JDF settings for a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Job Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Run List tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Close Job tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Add JDF job media to the Substrate Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Resolve media conflicts in JDF jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Managing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Color print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

View or edit default color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

View profile properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Compare profile gamuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Import or export profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Create or delete profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Edit profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Edit profile content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Print a test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Spot colors in Spot Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Start Spot Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

The Spot Pro workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Spot Pro group types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Spot Pro color types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Customizing Spot Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Spot Pro Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Manage Spot Pro columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Spot Pro toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Search for a spot color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Search for spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Edit a spot color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Spot color variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Delete a spot color or color group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Optimize spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Gamut warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108


Contents

6

Color swatch pages and swatch books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Print a color swatch page or swatch book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Print a swatch book of one or more spot colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Print a swatch book of all spot colors in a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Substitute colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Create and edit substitute colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Metrix Quick Impose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Using Metrix Quick Impose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Standalone Metrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Open standalone Metrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Open Metrix Quick Impose from Fiery Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

The Metrix Quick Impose window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Properties in Metrix Quick Impose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Create QuickSets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Export Profiles in Metrix Quick Impose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Export a job from Metrix Quick Impose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Multi-up layout for existing die in Metrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

The Select Die Cutting Tool window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Add a new die cutting tool item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Create a die cutting tool variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Import a die cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Export a die cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Search for a die cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Die Cutting Tool properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Managing server resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Fiery system software updates and patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Update Fiery server system software through Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Examine server performance and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Keep the server running at its best . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Virtual printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Set Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Create, edit, or duplicate virtual printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Manage virtual printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

VDP resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Back up VDP resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Restore VDP resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130


Contents

7

View and delete global resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Manage fonts on the Fiery server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Back up and restore fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

View groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Use the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

View the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Customize Job Log columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

View Job Log entry details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Print the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Export the contents of the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Export and/or clear the contents of the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Substrate Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Access Substrate Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Substrate Catalog window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Change the column display in Substrate Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Choose Substrate Catalog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Attributes for new entries in Substrate Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Create a Substrate Catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Define size attributes for Substrate Catalog entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Specify color profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Modify a Substrate Catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Edit a Substrate Catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Delete a Substrate Catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Choose media from Substrate Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Assign a temporary custom substrate size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Assign a temporary custom substrate size to a Substrate Catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Manage the Substrate Catalog database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Export the Substrate Catalog database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Replace the Substrate Catalog database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Merge Substrate Catalog databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Reset the Substrate Catalog to factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Substrate entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Common media attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147


Contents

8

Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Media unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Type details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Size Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Accessing Size Catalog from Fiery Command WorkStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Manage the Size Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Create or edit a size catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Delete a size catalog entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Unpublish or publish size catalog entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Import size catalog entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Export Size Catalog entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Reset the Size Catalog to factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Graphic arts tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Fiery graphic arts features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Print a control bar by default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

View and edit a control bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Create a custom or duplicate control bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Export, import, or delete a custom control bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Restore the factory default control bar settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Trapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Set default auto trapping for all jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Specify the trap width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Specify trap color reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Specify trap shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Specify trap object types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Progressives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

Paper simulation white point editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

Edit Paper Simulation white point values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Preflight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Configure and run Preflight check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164


Contents

9

Fiery ImageViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

ImageViewer requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Start ImageViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Fiery ImageViewer toolbar for quick access to common actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Adjust the image preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

Resize the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

View color values in the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

Object Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Color Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Local Color Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Front and Back Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

Image Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Animate ink limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Display and print color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

ImageViewer Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Edit response using curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Edit colors using the color wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Apply color edits to one or all pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Apply color edits through a local file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Apply color edits through a server preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Apply color curve from Curve2/Curve3/Curve4 file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Print the job with edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Export soft proof to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Compare the monitor profile to the output profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Set Fiery ImageViewer preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Changes from Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 to Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178


Contents

10

Overview


Command WorkStation is the print job management interface for Fiery servers.With Command WorkStation, you can connect to multiple Fiery servers and then manage jobs from a singlelocation. The intuitive interface makes complex tasks simple for Operators and Administrators, regardless of thenumber or types of jobs you process.Job Center and Device Center are integrated features of Command WorkStation that include tools to search for jobs,preview jobs, assign workflows, and manage printing.You can use Command WorkStation tools to do the following tasks:

• Import and preview jobs

• View information about Fiery servers

• Specify print options

• View and modify custom workflows

• Manage prepress job workflows

• Use Fiery applications such as imposition software and makeready applications for job preparation and assembly

A number of optional features are available on Fiery servers and all are documented in this Help system. However,optional features only display in Command WorkStation if they are supported by the connected Fiery server; forexample, HyperRIP mode.You can see the Fiery system version installed on the Fiery server in Device Center > General Info. (See TheCommand WorkStation workspace on page 11).For more information about Command WorkStation features, see Utilities, which is part of the user documentationset.

The Command WorkStation workspace

The main window provides a summary of activity that is occurring either on all of the connected Fiery servers or ona selected server, and provides access to features.To get started with adding a Fiery server to Command WorkStation, see Adding and connecting a Fiery server onpage 16.

Note: The content displayed varies for each Fiery server. The list below provides a general description. For specificinformation, see the Command WorkStation help for your Fiery server accessed from the Job Center Help menu.


Overview

11

The Command WorkStation main window includes the following areas:

• Main menus: provides access to commands.

• Sidebar: displays button navigation for the following screens (from the top, below the Fiery logo): Home, JobCenter, Apps and Resources, and Fiery Smart Search.

• Home: You can view a high-level status overview of your connected Fiery servers and a snapshot of printproduction statistics over the last week.

• Job Center: You can view and manage jobs sent to the connected Fiery server.

• Servers: displays a list of job queues or job status. Some Fiery servers display available media andconsumables. The display for each Fiery server can be collapsed to view additional servers.

• Job Status: displays the status of jobs that are currently processing and printing. To manage these jobs, clickthe Processing or Printing queue in the server list.

• Job Preview: displays the job content (thumbnail) of a processed job. On a Fiery server that is FS300 Pro orlater, thumbnails are displayed for spooled jobs as well as processed jobs.

• Job Summary: provides job information for the selected job, including the job name or title, number ofpages or sheets, and number of copies. Other information, such as the time of spooling or processing, mediaused, preflight or job verification, is displayed according to the selected Fiery server. You can edit some ofthe job property fields by clicking the pencil icon.

• Job List: displays the list of jobs and a toolbar of available job actions. Right-click a job to get a complete listof job actions.

• Apps and Resources: provides access to all installed Fiery applications with a single click, and displays otherapplications and resources for the Fiery server. You can also access free software trials and downloads, assupported for the selected Fiery server.

Note: An internet connection is required to view the list of available Apps and Resources.

Fiery Smart Search

Fiery Smart Search can search for information and training resources to learn more about Command WorkStationand Fiery features.1 In Job Center, click the Fiery Smart Search icon (magnifying glass) in the bottom-left of Fiery sidebar.

Fiery Smart Search is always available in the bottom-left sidebar as long as another window is not open on top ofJob Center.

2 In the Search for Fiery information area, type the search term and press Enter.The list is scrollable by using the mouse or scroll bar.The search window displays 10 results at a time.

3 Click a search result.The information opens in your default web browser.


Overview

12

Job Center

The Command WorkStation Job Center is a centralized location where you can view and manage jobs sent to theconnected Fiery server. Job Center includes the Printing, Processing, and Ready to Print queues and the Held,Printed, and Archived, and Completed views.In Job Center, you can do the following:

• Search for jobs, view job properties, and preview jobs across all Fiery servers. A toolbar provides access todifferent functions.

• Assign workflows and manage jobs

• Use custom views of the job list for efficient job management

• View jobs in the Completed view, which lists all printed jobs in the Fiery server, regardless of the location of thejob

• View the status of all Fiery servers

• View information on the press

• Preview jobs

• View thumbnail icons of jobs

• Edit properties in the Job Summary pane

• Drag and drop jobs from the desktop to Command WorkStation

• Access the Help for your Fiery server

Status of processing and printing jobs

At the top of Job Center, the Processing pane and Printing pane (blue rectangles) show the progress of jobs that areprocessing and printing, respectively.You can drag and drop jobs to the Processing pane.If your Fiery server supports HyperRIP mode, additional status is available. When a job is being processed in pageparallel mode (single job mode), the progress bar in the Processing pane of Job Center is divided into sections,representing the progress of each processor currently in use. For job parallel mode (multiple jobs mode), theProcessing queue under the job status column additionally displays inline progress bars for each currently processingjob.

Commands for managing jobs in a queue

You can access commands for a job that is displayed in the Held, Printed, or Archived queues in Job Center. Right-click on a job in a queue to display the list of commands or select one from the Actions menu.Optional features are displayed only if they are supported by the connected Fiery server.

Apply Workflow Displays a list of server presets and virtual printers which can be applied tothe selected job.

Archive Archives a selected job.


Overview

13

Delete Deletes a selected job.

Duplicate Creates a copy of the selected job.

ImageViewer Opens ImageViewer (if supported) displaying the first page of a single job(displays the first selected job if multiple jobs are selected). For moreinformation, see Fiery ImageViewer on page 165.

Metrix Quick Impose Opens Metrix Quick Impose, which is imposition software thatautomatically and dynamically determines how many press sheets you needand the optimum layout for each press sheet. For more information, see Metrix Quick Impose on page 113.

Preflight Opens the Preflight Settings dialog box with a single selected job displayed(displays the first selected job if multiple jobs are selected) and checks mostthe common areas of output error to ensure that files print successfully. Formore information, see Preflight on page 163.

Preview Opens the Preview dialog box, where you can view images of pages in thejob.

Process and Hold Sends a selected job from the Held, Printed, or Archived lists to theProcessing queue.

Properties Opens the Job Properties window, which displays information such as printsettings about a selected job. If multiple jobs are selected, properties that arenot shared by the selected jobs are blank.

Remove Raster Removes the raster of a selected job from the Held or Archived lists.

Rename Renames a selected job.

Send To Moves a job to the queue of another Fiery server. The destination Fieryserver must be connected to Command WorkStation, otherwise it is notdisplayed in the Send To list.

Send to Printing Queue Sends a selected job to the press for printing.

Note: Send to Printing Queue may not be supported for all Fiery servers.

Send to Ready to Print Allows you to send the job to the press for printing.

Note: Send to Ready to Print may not be supported for all Fiery servers.

Apply Metrix Quick Set Opens Metrix Quick Impose where you can create QuickSets or choosefrom existing QuickSets. For more information, see Metrix Quick Imposeon page 113.

Device Center

The Command WorkStation shows system information in a single workspace. You can use the Device Center toconfigure the connected Fiery server and access various print management tools.To access Device Center, click the More icon (three dots) and select Device Center, or double-click the Fiery servername in the Servers list.


Overview

14

In Device Center, you can do the following tasks:

• View information about the connected Fiery server.

• Set job property defaults, including color defaults.

• View and modify Substrate Catalog, variable data printing (VDP), color profiles, spot color tables, and fontsettings.

• View and create available virtual printers and server presets.

• View a detailed log of all processed and printed jobs.

Device Center includes the following settings:

• General - View information about the connected Fiery server, including the IP address, capacity (amount of harddisk drive space available), and a list of installed options and packages. The General section includes thefollowing features: General Info, Server Configuration, and Tools.

• Color Setup - The Color Setup section includes Color Management and may include Control Bar, Trapping, andHalftone Simulation, if these features are supported by the connected Fiery server.

• Resources - View and modify Substrate Catalog, variable data printing (VDP), color profiles, spot color tables,and font settings. The Resources section includes the following: Size Catalog, VDP Resources, Profiles, and Fonts,and may include the Substrate Catalog, Spot Pro and Specialty Colors, if these features are supported by theconnected Fiery server.

• Workflows - View a list of available virtual printers and server presets. The Workflows section includes thefollowing: Job Presets, Virtual Printers, and Image Enhance.

• Logs - View a detailed log of all processed and printed jobs. The Logs tab includes the Job Log tab.


Overview

15

Adding and connecting a Fiery server

Access levels

You can log on as Administrator, Operator, or any user to whom the Administrator has given access. Administratorscan set passwords for each type of user.

• Administrator - Has full access to all Command WorkStation and Fiery server control panel functions. AnAdministrator password is required.

• Operator - Has access to all Job Center functions. In Device Center, an Operator does not have access toConfigure, Backup and Restore, changing passwords, and deleting the Job Log. An Operator can view SubstrateCatalog, virtual printers, and color management functions, but cannot edit them. An Operator password isrequired.

• User name - The Administrator creates users and assigns them to groups, and assigns privileges (such as guestprivileges or creating server presets) to the groups.

For more information about setting access levels, see Configure Help and Configuration and Setup, which is part ofthe user documentation set.

Connecting to a Fiery server

To use Command WorkStation, you must connect to a Fiery server.The Servers list of Command WorkStation manages access to any available Fiery server. You can choose to add (andconnect to), remove, and disconnect from, a Fiery server.You can search for a Fiery server by entering the server name or IP address in the dialog box. After the serverconnection is made and authenticated, the IP address switches to the Fiery server name in the Servers list. CommandWorkStation can be connected to more than one Fiery server at a time.If the connection to the Fiery server is disconnected, Command WorkStation attempts to reconnect automatically.For more information about Autoreconnect, see Set Command WorkStation preferences on page 20.If any of the Command WorkStation plugin windows are currently open at the time of losing the connection to theFiery server, the plugin window will display a message to the user, and provide an option to save the job as a flattenedPDF.



16

Add and connect to a Fiery server

You can add, connect to, and reconnect to a Fiery server.Before you add a Fiery server, you need its server name or IP address.If you do not have the server name or the IP address, you can use search to find any available Fiery server on thenetwork. See Search for an available Fiery server on page 17.

1 Click the plus sign in the Servers list or in the Home screen. Type the IP address or server name for the Fieryserver and then click Add.

2 Select the user from the User list, and type the appropriate password.In addition to the default user names of Administrator and Operator, users can log in with their own user names ifthe network administrator has assigned them as a member of one of the groups.

3 Click Login.

4 If you previously connected to a Fiery server in the Servers list, select the Fiery server and click Connect.

Search for an available Fiery server

If you do not know the server name or IP address of a Fiery server, you can search your local area network for a Fieryserver. You can either search within the subnet that contains the local computer, or search within a specific subnetor IP address range.1 Click the plus sign in the Servers list.

2 If the Add Fiery Server dialog box does not display the results of an automatic search of the local subnet, or if youdo not have a server name or IP address, click Advanced Search.

3 Do one of the following:

• To search for Fiery servers within a specific IP address range, select IP Range from the Search drop-downmenu.

• Enter the start of the IP address range in From. To include the beginning of an octet, enter 0. For example,10.100.10.0.

• Enter the end of the IP address range in To. To include through the end of an octet, enter 255. For example,10.100.10.255.

• To search for Fiery servers within a specific subnet range, select Subnet from the Search drop-down menu.

• Enter the Subnet Address to indicate the subnet range to include. Enter 0 in the octets where any number isacceptable. For example, 10.100.10.0 will find 10.100.10.1 through 10.100.10.255.

• Enter the Subnet Mask to indicate any subnet ranges to exclude. Enter 0 in the octets where nothing isexcluded. For example, 255.255.255.0 will exclude everything but the indicated subnet address in the firstthree octets, and will allow anything in the fourth octet (such as 10.100.10.30).

4 Click Go.Any available Fiery server that matches the search criteria is shown. You can filter the search result list by typinga keyword into the Filter by keyword field.



17

5 Select the Fiery server from the results list and click OK and then Add to add it to the Servers list.

Log off the Fiery server

Logging off the Fiery server terminates the connection between the Fiery server and Command WorkStation.1 Select a Fiery server from the Servers list.

2 Click the More icon beside the name of the Fiery server and select one of the following:

• If you are logged in as administrator, click Logout "Administrator".

• If you are logged in as operator, click Logout "Operator".

View another Fiery server

You can switch the view from one connected Fiery server to another in Command WorkStation.• Click any Fiery server in the Servers list to switch views from one connected Fiery server to another.

The Servers list

The Servers list shows information about Fiery servers that are currently connected, or were connected, even if theyare currently disconnected.The Servers list is a "drop zone", which means that you can drag and drop files to the queues in the Servers list. TheServers list is designed so that information about connected printers is displayed immediately below the name of theFiery server. You can expand an individual Fiery server by clicking the plus sign to the left of the Fiery server name. Ifyou exit Command WorkStation, the Servers list is retained.

Consumables

Consumables are limited resources such as substrate or ink that are used (or "consumed") by the press to print jobs.Information about consumables is available in:

Note: This feaures is available if the connected press supports it.

• The Servers list, below the names of the queues for the Fiery server.

• Device Center > General > General Info > Consumables.

Server information

To view a detailed list of Fiery server information, choose Device Center > General > General Info.



18

Errors and alerts

The Servers list provides information about the status of the Fiery server and error messages about on the press.

Status messages

Status messages may be about the Fiery server or press. The messages are as follows:

Idle Fiery server or press is idle.

Busy Fiery server is processing a job.

Printing Fiery server is printing a job.

Canceling Fiery server is canceling a job.

Sleep Press is in Sleep mode.

Low Power Press is in Low Power mode.

Calibration Press is performing calibration.

Maintenance Required Scheduled press maintenance is required.

Warming Up Press is warming up after waking from sleep or low power mode.

Error messages

Error messages are very important messages about issues that impact both the Fiery server and the press and preventjobs from printing (for example, a paper jam). If multiple errors occur simultaneously, the most critical error appearsfirst. After the first error is resolved, the next error appears.The following are examples of error messages that may appear:

• Check press power and cable connections

• Press serial communications lost

• Printing suspended



19

Customizing Command WorkStation

Set Command WorkStation preferences

You can set preferences globally for Command WorkStation—for example, to reset the application settings to theiroriginal defaults.1 To open the Preferences window:

• On a Windows computer, click Edit > Preferences.

• On a Mac OS computer, click Command WorkStation > Preferences.

2 Under General, specify any of these general setting preferences:

• Auto reconnect - Select Enable Auto reconnect to automatically reconnect to disconnected servers with savedpasswords.

• Updates - Click Check now to open the Fiery Software Manager to check for a more recent version ofCommand WorkStation software and the Fiery workflow applications online.

• Reset settings - Click Reset to restore application settings to their original defaults.

Note: Fiery servers that have been added will be retained in the Servers list, along with their passwords.

• Clear data - Click Clear data to clear saved passwords, for all users and all servers that Command WorkStationhas saved passwords.

• Archive Manager - Select whether to enable or disable Archive Manager.

• Fiery Health Monitor - Select Display status in Job Center to show the server health status in Job Center.

• Improvement program - To help EFI improve the quality, reliability, and performance of the software bysending anonymous usage data but not your name, address, or any other personally identifiable information,click the relevant check box.



20

3 Under Region, specify any of these regional setting preferences:

• Language - Select the language you want to display Command WorkStation. By default, CommandWorkStation uses the local operating system language, if the language is supported. If the language is notsupported, Command WorkStation defaults to English.

Note: Changing the language of Command WorkStation will also apply to Fiery Hot Folders, and vice versa, ifinstalled on the same client.

• Measurement units - Specify the units of measurement used to display attributes, such as page sizes andcustom sizes. This setting does not affect predefined page-size values.

Note: If Metrix Quick Impose is installed, the Measurement units setting also applies to the values enteredmanually in the imposition window.

4 Under Export, you can share settings with another Command WorkStation client.

• Import - Click Import to import Command WorkStation settings from another computer.

• Export - Click Export to export Command WorkStation settings to a zip file, which can be used to set up otherCommand WorkStation clients.

5 Click OK to save and close the Preferences window.

Manage Job Center columns

You can customize column headings for the queues. Change the order of these columns or add/delete them topresent information relevant to your particular print environment.

Change the column display

You can specify sets of Job Center columns, add columns, or remove them.1 Right-click any column below the window title bar.

2 Select either Standard Set, VDP Set, or JDF Set.

3 Select an item from the menu to add to or remove from the columns.

Adjust the width of a column

You can change the width of a Job Center column.• Drag a column border to the left or right.



21

Expand or collapse panes

You can expand or collapse the Job Preview, Job Summary, as well as the individual servers in the Servers panes.• Do one of the following:

• Click the arrow icon in the title bar of the pane to expand or collapse the window.

• Click the plus sign or minus sign next to a server in the Servers list.

Customize the toolbar

You can customize the toolbar in Job Center. You can also restore the default toolbar icons.Some toolbar icons are available only if the Fiery server supports them.

1 Right-click anywhere in the toolbar, and select Customize from the submenu that appears.Standard Set is the default set of toolbar icons.

2 In the Customize Toolbar window, add or remove toolbar icons by selecting a tool and clicking either Add orRemove to move a tool between the Available Tools list and the Selected Tools list.You can add the following toolbar icons to the standard set:

• Process and Hold - Processes the selected job and keeps it in the Held list.

• Archive - Archives the selected job.

• Metrix Quick Impose - Opens the Metric Quick Impose window for the selected job

For a list of the standard set icons, see Job Center toolbar icons on page 22.

3 Specify the order in which the toolbar icons should be shown by selecting a tool and clicking Up or Down.

4 Click Standard Set to return to the default toolbar icons.

Job Center toolbar icons

The Job Center toolbar displays a standard set of icons.

Import Opens the Import Files window.

Send to Press Sends the selected job to the press for printing.

Note: Send to Press may not be supported for all Fiery servers.

Send to Printing Queue Sends a selected job to the press for printing.


Send to Ready to Print Sends the selected job to the press for printing.



22


Properties Opens the Job Properties window for the selected job.

Preview Opens the Fiery Preview window with the selected job displayed.

Delete Deletes the selected job.

Spot Pro Opens the Spot Pro window.

Logs Opens the Job Log window.

Substrate Catalog Opens the Substrate Catalog window.

Note: Some tools are available only if the Fiery server supports them.



23

Configuring Fiery server settings

Access Configure

After you start the Fiery server for the first time, or install system software, you must set up the Fiery server. If youdo not, default settings are used. Make sure that settings are appropriate for your printing environment. If yournetwork or printing environment changes, you may need to adjust your settings.You can set up the Fiery server from a client computer using Configure, which you can access from the followinglocations:

• Command WorkStation

• WebTools (with a supported Internet browser)

Access Configure from Command WorkStation

1 From Command WorkStation, connect to the desired Fiery server and log in as Administrator.

2 Do one of the following to start Configure:

• In Device Center, select General Info, then click Configure in the lower right corner.

• In the Server menu, click Configure.

3 From Configure, change current Fiery server setup options.

Access Configure from WebTools

Use Configure to set up the Fiery server. Setup is required the first time the Fiery server is turned on or after systemsoftware is installed. You also use Configure to specify information about the network environment and printingpreferences for jobs that users send to the Fiery server.1 Open an Internet browser and type the IP address of the Fiery server.

2 In WebTools, click the Configure tab.

Note: As a security measure, WebTools is designed to work only over Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure(HTTPS). By default, WebTools uses a self-signed certificate created by the Fiery. This causes the web browser todisplay a certificate error while accessing WebTools. It is safe to ignore this message and proceed to accessWebTools.



24

3 Log on with Administrator privileges.

Locate Help and other information about Configure

In Configure, click the Help icon on the right side of the screen.For information about setup options in Configure that are not discussed in this Help or Configure Help, seeConfiguration and Setup, which is part of the user documentation set.

Note: Some Configure options may not be supported by your Fiery server.

Exit Configure

Some changes won't take effect until you reboot the Fiery server. If a setting change requires a restart, reboot, orother action, the banner at the top of the page will display a message.1 Make the appropriate changes.

If you are making multiple setting changes that require a reboot, you can wait to reboot until you have finishedmaking all your setting changes.

2 Reboot the Fiery server so that the changes take effect.

View, save, or print server settings

The Server Configuration tab in Command WorkStation lists the current Fiery server settings.

View server configuration settings

From the Server Configuration tab, you can view categories of Fiery server settings or change the Setup options.1 From Command WorkStation, connect to the desired Fiery server and click Device Center > General > Server

Configuration.


• Click the shortcuts on the left side of the page to view settings for a particular category.

• Click Configure in the bottom-right corner of the window to change current Fiery server Setup options.



25

Save the server configuration as a file

You can save the server configuration as a file for each Fiery server you are connected to. This is especially useful ifyou are managing multiple Fiery servers and want to keep track of any changes made in Fiery server Setup.1 From Command WorkStation, connect to the desired Fiery server.

2 Click Device Center > General > Server Configuration.

3 Click Save As.

4 Specify the file name and location.

5 Select PDF or Text for the file type.

6 Click Save.

Print the server configuration page

After you have performed Setup, print the server configuration to confirm your settings, and post it near the Fieryserver for quick reference. Users need the information on this page, such as the current default settings.1 Save the configuration file.

2 Print the saved file to an office printer.

Users and Groups

You can define privileges for the users who access the Fiery server by assigning them to groups. Several groups areprovided by default. All users in a group have the same privileges.You can view detailed information about users and groups from Configure > User Accounts.In addition to assigning to a group the users that you have created, you can add users from your organization's globaladdress list. To do so, you must first enable LDAP services on the Fiery server.

Create new users

If users are not in the global address list or contact list, you can create them manually. Any name that appears in thecontact list can become a user that you assign to a group.The Administrators and Operators groups have a default user named "Administrator" or "Operator," respectively.

1 From Configure, select User Accounts.

2 Click the Fiery Contact List button.

3 In the Fiery Contact List dialog box, click the Add User button.

4 In the Create User dialog box, specify the required information. Click Create.



26

5 Click Close.

Add users to existing groups

You can add existing users to an existing group, or you can create users and add them to the existing group. You canadd users to as many groups as you want.Creating a user account does not assign any privileges to that user until you add the user to a group.


2 Select the group to which you want to add users.

3 Click Assign Users.

4 Assign the user to groups as required, using any of the following approaches:

• To create a new user and assign them to a group, select Create New User & Assign from the drop-down list,type the appropriate information in the Create User dialog box, then click Save.

• To assign an existing user account to a group, select Add from Contact List. In the Assign Users dialog, enterthe account name under Users of Fiery Contact List, and press return, or select the account if listed and clickAdd Users.

• To assign a user from the Global Address List, select Add from Global Address List. If LDAP is configured andenabled, this list contains names from your organization's corporate database. If the Configure LDAP Settingsbutton displays, click the button to configure the LDAP settings to work with Command WorkStation.

5 Click Close when you have finished adding user accounts to groups.

Remove users from groups

You can remove a user from a group. Any jobs that the user has already sent to the Fiery server are still processed,and the Job Log retains the name of the user with relevant job information.After you remove a user from a group, the user still remains in the Fiery Contact List.

Note: You cannot remove the default users named "Administrator" or "Operator."


2 Select the group in which the user exists.

3 Move the cursor over the name of the user you want to remove from the group.Notice that the Edit and Delete icons are displayed.

4 Click the Delete icon.The user is deleted from the group, but not from the Fiery Contact List.



27

Change user attributes

You can change user attributes, such as the user password and email address. If the user is already logged in, yourchanges affect the user when the user logs out and logs in again.To change the default Administrator and Operator passwords, you can use the following procedure or configure anew password.


2 Click the Fiery Contact List button.

3 Move the cursor over the name of a user.Notice that the Edit icon is displayed.

4 Click the Edit icon. In the Edit User dialog box, edit user attributes and click Save.

Change group privileges


2 Move the cursor over the name of a group.Notice that the Edit icon displays.

3 Click the Edit icon. In the Edit Group dialog box, select or clear privileges and click Save.

Note: These privileges may not be supported on all Fiery servers.

• Calibration - Allows members of this group to calibrate the Fiery server. For the default groups, onlyAdministrator and Operator groups have this privilege.

• Create Server Presets - Allows members of this group to save a set of print options that users can select fortheir job.

• Manage Workflows - Allows members of this group to create, edit, and delete Server Presets and virtualprinters.

• Edit jobs - Allows members to edit jobs in the Held or Printed queues.

Delete users

You can delete a user from the Fiery server completely. Any jobs that the user has already sent to the Fiery server arestill processed, and the Job Log retains the name of the user with relevant job information.

Note: You cannot delete the default users named Administrator or Operator, and you cannot delete theAdministrators or Operators group.




28

2 To delete a user from the Fiery server completely, do the following:a) Click the Fiery Contact List button.

b) In the Fiery Contact List dialog box, move the cursor over the name of the user you want to delete.Notice that the Edit and Delete icons display.

Note: The Delete icon only displays if you are allowed to delete the user.

c) Click the Delete icon.The user is deleted from the Fiery server completely.

d) Click Close.

About backing up and restoring

You can back up and restore several categories of settings.

We recommend that you save the backup file to a network server, not the Fiery server itself. Otherwise, when youreinstall system software, the backup file is deleted.Important information to consider when you back up and restore:

• Saved Backup and Restore settings can be used from both Configure and Command WorkStation.

• In the case of upgrading your Fiery server to a new system software version, you can restore the backup filecreated from the previous version. However, all new settings not available in the previous system software are setto system default.

• Backup and Restore settings can be restored to another Fiery server of the same model and version, but settingssuch as Server Name, IP address and Network settings are not restored; the existing settings remain untouched.This prevents problems with both Fiery servers co-existing on the same network.

Back up or restore Fiery server settings

You can back up or restore Fiery server settings from Command WorkStation. If your Fiery server is FS350 or earlier,you can also back up or restore settings from Configure.

Note: The Restore Fiery Settings and Restore Default Fiery Settings option are not available for every Fiery server.

Back up Fiery server settings from Configure (FS350 and earlier)

From Configure, you can choose which Fiery server settings you want to back up.1 From Configure, choose Fiery Server > Backup.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions to back up your settings.



29

Back up Fiery server settings from Command WorkStation (FS350 and earlier)

From Command WorkStation, you can choose which Fiery server settings you want to back up.1 Connect to the Fiery server and do one of the following:

• Click Device Center > General > Tools > Backup & Restore.

• Select Server > Backup and Restore.

2 Click Backup.

3 Select the items you want to back up.

4 In the dialog box that appears, select a location to save the file and specify a name for the backup file.

5 (Optional) Select Add date to file name.

6 Click Next, and then click Finish.

Back up Fiery server settings from Command WorkStation (FS400 and later)

From Command WorkStation, you can choose which Fiery server settings you want to back up.1 Connect to the Fiery server as Administrator and do one of the following:

• Click Device Center > General > Tools > Fiery Resources and Settings.


2 In the new web browser window that appears, click Fiery Resources and Settings.

3 Click Backup Now.

4 Select the items you want to back up and click Continue.

5 In the dialog box that appears, specify a name for the backup file.

6 (Optional) Select Add date to file name.

7 Click Continue.

8 Download the file you want and specify a location for the file.You must choose an .fbf file and a .DAT file.

Restore Fiery server settings from Configure (FS350 and earlier)

If you previously backed up Fiery server settings, you can restore them from Configure.1 From Configure, choose Fiery Server > Restore.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore your settings.



30

Restore Fiery server settings from Command WorkStation (FS350 and earlier)

If you previously backed up Fiery server settings, you can restore them from Command WorkStation.1 Connect to the Fiery server and do one of the following:

• Click Device Center > General > Tools > Backup & Restore.


2 Click Restore.

3 In the dialog box that appears, browse to the location of the configuration settings you want to restore and clickOpen or select a recent backup.

4 Click Next and select the items you want to restore.

5 Click Next, and then click Finish.

6 After the restore operation is complete, reboot the Fiery server if you are prompted.

Restore Fiery server settings from Command WorkStation (FS400 and later)

If you previously backed up Fiery server settings, you can restore them from Command WorkStation.1 Connect to the Fiery server as Administrator and do one of the following:

• Click Device Center > General > Tools > Fiery Resources and Settings.


2 In the new web browser window that appears, click Fiery Resources and Settings.

3 Click Restore.

4 In the dialog box that appears, click Choose File and browse to the location of the configuration settings you wantto restore and click Open.You must choose an .fbf file and a .DAT file.

5 Click Continue.

6 Select the items you want to restore and click Continue.

7 After the restore operation is complete, reboot the Fiery server if you are prompted.



31

Viewing jobs

You can view the content of jobs in a number of different ways.

• Spooled, unprocessed jobs: Using Fiery Preview - See Fiery Preview on page 34.

• Processed jobs:

• In the Job Preview pane - This is in the Command WorkStation main window. See Viewing jobs in the JobPreview pane on page 32.

• Using Fiery Preview - See Fiery Preview on page 34.

• Using Fiery ImageViewer - Available if supported by the Fiery server. See Fiery ImageViewer on page 165.

Viewing jobs in the Job Preview pane

The Job Preview pane in Job Center displays specific information of a processed job. Thumbnails for all surfaces inthat job are also displayed in the Job Preview pane. You can view a processed job in the Fiery ImageViewer window.

Note: A spooled, unprocessed job can be viewed in the Fiery Preview window.Start Command WorkStation and select a processed job in the Held list to display it in the Job Preview pane.Information about the job is displayed. Some categories of information are editable.The Job Preview pane is at the right side of the Command WorkStation window. The illustration below shows aprocessed job. If the job is processed, tools are provided for navigating through the document.


Viewing jobs

32

Note: Any field with the pencil icon can be edited.

1 Thumbnail

2 Name of the job

3 Number of sheets in the job after it has been processed

4 Number of copies you want to print

5 Media information, such as size, media type or media weight

6 Preflight information

An icon indicates the status.

7 Last action taken on the job, such as spooled, processed, or printed, along with a date and time stamp

8 Workflow shows the Virtual Printer, if used. Otherwise, displays Unassigned.

Note: The categories of information displayed depend on the capabilities of your Fiery server and the status of theselected job.


Viewing jobs

33

Fiery Preview

Fiery Preview is used in the preprocessing workflow to preview and define various print outputs. Fiery Previewprovides a method to preview spooled jobs.Fiery Preview also includes the Version Editor using which you can view spot colors or layers in a file and savedifferent versions.Use Fiery Preview to perform the following tasks:

• Preview a JDF or PDF job before processing.

• Define a die for the file, which you can then print as a separate job.

• Create different versions of the job based on spot colors or layers using Version Editor.

• Define a spot color or a layer as a die line using Version Editor.

After the job has been processed, you can view the job using ImageViewer.

Note: You can view a job in Fiery Preview even if the job does not have spot colors or layers.Spooled jobs that are exported from Metrix Quick Impose are listed in the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list asexported layouts. You can import both spooled jobs and exported layouts from Fiery Command WorkStation toFiery Preview.

Using Fiery Preview

Any PDF or JDF spooled job can be viewed in Fiery Preview.Using Version Editor, you can also create different versions if the job has spot colors or layers.Using Version Editor, you can also create different versions of the job.

1 Open a job in Fiery Preview in one of the following ways:

• Right-click the job and select Preview.

• Select the job and choose Preview from the Actions menu.

• Select the job and click the Preview icon in the toolbar.

The job appears in the Fiery Preview window. Thumbnails of the job display in the left pane, and the selectedpage in the main pane.The Version Editor button is available in the upper-right corner of the Fiery Preview window.


Fiery Preview

34

2 In the Fiery Preview window, the menus provided are:

• File: Preferences and Exit.

• Preferences: Set the Fiery Preview preferences to factory default.

• Exit: Exits the window and closes the job without making any changes.

• View: controls for zooming and navigating through the pages of the job. The viewing options of Fit towindow, Fit to width, and Fit to height have corresponding icons in the lower-right corner of the window.

• Help: Opens the Fiery Preview Help.

You can use the following controls:

• Scroll bar at the side of the window.

• Page number navigation at the bottom of the window.

• Zoom control slider and the drop-down menu to select zoom percentage at the bottom of the window.

The following icons are available in the upper-left corner of the Fiery Preview window:

• Pointer (arrow): Selects a page.

• Pan tool (hand): Moves the job around the window.

• Zoom tool (magnifying glass): Zooms in and out.

3 To view the spot colors, layers and versions of a job, click Version Editor.

Using Version Editor

In Version Editor, you can view layers, spot colors, dies, and create versions of the job. Version Editor extracts thespot color or layer settings from the job, and then opens the job where you can add, edit, save, or delete versions. Youcan also select different spot colors or layers and define them as die lines.The following icons and controls are the same as in the Fiery Preview window:

• Pointer (arrow): Selects a page.

• Pan tool (hand): Moves the job around the window.

• Zoom tool (magnifying glass): Zooms in and out.

• Scroll bar at the rightmost side of the window.

• Page number navigation at the bottom of the window.

• Viewing options of Fit to height, Fit to width, and Fit to window in the lower-right corner of the window.

• Zoom control slider in the lower-right corner of the window.

The following controls are specific to Version Editor:

• Version: Drop-down menu of the saved versions.

• Save icon: Saves the current version.


Fiery Preview

35

• Add icon (plus sign): Allows you to create a new version. You can choose to overwrite the current version or savea new version.

• Delete icon: Deletes versions displayed in the Versions field.

• Spot colors tab: Displays all the spot colors in the original job.

• Layers tab: Displays all the layers in the original job.

• Select die line (pencil tip icon): Selects the die line of the job. You can use XMP data (if available in the job), spotcolors, or layers to be used for the die line.

If the die line functionality is supported on the Fiery server, the following icons appear in the Version Editor windowwhen spot colors are defined as die lines:

• Add to die library (arrow with plus sign): Adds the die line to the die library.

Note: Only spot colors can be added to the die library. Layers cannot be added to the die library.

• Eye icon in the Die Line area: Displays or hides the preview of the die line. Click to change.

• Remove icon (minus sign): Deletes the die line.

The following Version Editor controls appear in the Fiery Preview window after you have manipulated a job inVersion Editor:

• Die Line (Eye icon): Displays or hides the preview of the die line of the job. The die line can also have XMP(Extensible Metadata Platform) data.

• Export: Exports the selected versions as jobs to the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list. If multiple versionshave been saved, you can select all versions in the Export versions to held queue dialog box. The versions areexported to the Held list as separate jobs.

Note: The Export icon is available in the upper-right corner of the Version Editor window. It appears both in theVersion Editor and the Fiery Preview window only when you create and save a new version of a job.

Versioning

To create versions of a job, you must start with a file that has been built with either layers or spot colors.The layers or spot colors can include dies. You can add dies from the layers or spot colors.If your file is flatwork, such as a package or a label, it must be pre-imposed before saving versions. The step-and-repeat layout is then ready for print when you open it for versioning.Jobs can be submitted to the Fiery server as different versions. Versions can also be created on the Fiery server froma single job. The press operator identifies and treats each version as a separate job.Different versions of the same job can use the same finishing method after the job is processed and printed. In thistype of preprocessing workflow, the prepress operator needs to identify the different versions present in each file,ensure that each version is ticketed properly, and list them as different jobs in the job list.

Creating versions

You can create versions of a job if the original file has been built with spot colors or layers. If the job is flatwork or abooklet, it must be pre-imposed. The job is then imported into Fiery Command WorkStation Held list.


Fiery Preview

36

Note: To create versions of a job that has been laid out in Metrix Quick Impose, you must export the job fromMetrix Quick Impose as JDF.To create versions of a job:

1 Open the spooled job in Fiery Preview in one of the following ways:




The job appears in the Fiery Preview window. Thumbnails of the job display in the left pane, and the selectedpage in the main pane.

2 Click the Version Editor icon in the upper-right corner of the Fiery Preview window.The job opens in the Version Editor window.

3 Click either the Spot colors tab or the Layers tab.

4 Select or clear the check boxes to preview the spot colors or layers.

5 To create a version, select the spot color or layer and click the Add (plus sign) icon.

6 Enter a name for the version in the Enter version name dialog box and click OK.If you have previously created a version in the Version Editor for this file, a dialog box opens and asks if you wantto save this as the current version. Choose either Yes, overwrite the current version or No, create a new version.

7 Click the Export icon to print the versions you have created.

8 In the Export versions to held queue dialog box, select the versions you want to print and click OK. If multipleversions have been saved, you can select the versions in the Export versions to held queue dialog box. Theversions are exported to the Held list as separate jobs.

Note: The versions you export can be processed and previewed using ImageViewer.

9 In Fiery Command WorkStation, you can select the job and specify job properties.

10 If you do not want to print the versions at this time, close the Version Editor window.The versions will be saved as part of the job. The user can choose to export and print the job at a later time.

Note: If the version is not exported as a new job, the original imported file will be printed without applying any ofthe versioning edits.

Die line

A die line represents the outline or layout of the packaging material that is used to create the final packagingproduct. Die lines are used in a wide range of markets; mostly in folding carton and corrugated packaging. Based onthe die line, content is created, which is sent to a prepress operator in the form of a job.


Fiery Preview

37

The Die Printing feature supports an input file containing only one set of die line instructions. An input file can alsocontain two sets of die line information, for example, a folding carton that requires printing on both the outer andinner surface. For input files that contain two sets of die line information, do the following:

• Remove the second set of die line information. This is usually the mirrored die line information for the innersurface.

• For non-perfecting press, divide the input file into two separate files; the outer (front) and inner (back) surface,each with its corresponding die line information. You can now print the die lines on both sides as each side willbe processed and printed on a separate press run.

Manually define a die line

Jobs can have spot colors and layers that can be defined as a die line. To manually define a die line, do the following:





2 In the Fiery Preview window, click the Version Editor icon in the upper-right corner.

3 In the Version Editor window, click either the Spot colors or Layers tab.The list of spot colors and layers available in the image are listed in each tab.

4 Select either spot colors or layers to define as a die line.

Note: You can either select a spot color or a layer as a die line. You cannot select both.

5 In the Die Line section, click Select die line (pencil tip icon).

6 Select the spot colors or layers to use as a die line. Click OK.The selected spot colors or layers are listed in the Die Line section.

7 With the die lines listed in the Die Line section, you can perform the following:

• Click the Remove icon (minus sign) to delete the die line.

• Click the Eye icon to display or hide the preview of the die line. Click to change.

• If spot colors have been defined as a die line, click the Add to die library icon (plus sign) to add the die line tothe die library. The die library can have default die lines available for use.

Note: You cannot add layers that are defined as die lines to the die library.

8 Select the job in the Held list. Right-click and choose Process and Hold.After the job is processed, you can open the job in ImageViewer to view the three surfaces that are generated. Thethree surfaces are Content, Die + content, and Die.


Fiery Preview

38

Automatic die detection

The Fiery server supports three types of automatic die detection. They are:

1 Spot Die Library: Users can save a frequently used spot color as a die line and add the die line to the die library.The Fiery server automatically detects the die line in the die library, and when the job is processed, it is ready tobe printed. To enable this automatic detection, the Override using server’s die library option needs to be checkedin the Job Properties > Job Info .

2 ESKO XMP Technical Ink support: A workflow has been developed with ESKO, (a third-party product). ESKOsoftware uses XMP as meta data in their workflows. Information relating to the inks used is defined in the InkManager application. Users can define a die in an ESKO workflow as a Technical Ink instead of using a commonspot color. For more information on using the Ink Manager application, see the ESKO Product Documentation.

3 ESKO Automation Engine submission: Die detection is done inside the ESKO Automation Engine prior tosubmitting the jobs to the Fiery server. Currently, the ESKO workflow supports two surfaces when printing: die(only) and content (only). The Die + content surface is not supported.When PDFs are received in the ESKO Automation Engine, the die and content surfaces are automaticallyseparated to create two PDFs. The layout setting of N-up is created and mapped to the die setup. N-upimposition is done inside the ESKO Automation Engine. The JDF.zip output is sent to the Fiery server. Fieryserver recognizes the job as a JDF archive with two PDFs, namely die and content. Job Properties settings for dieline printing are automatically turned on. The user can modify these settings. When the job is processed, the usercan open the job in ImageViewer, to view the surfaces that have been generated.Job information such as Job status, finish, delete, or abort is sent back to the ESKO Automation Engine.

Automatically detect a die line

You can define a spot color to be automatically recognized as a die line. This is done by adding the die line to the dielibrary. For information about adding a die line to a die library, see Manually define a die line on page 38.After a die line has been added to a die library, the Fiery server automatically detects the die line and the job is readyto be processed and printed. With automatic detection, you do not need to open Version Editor and manually definethe die line for each job.

1 Select a job and do one of the following:

• Double-click the job.

• Right-click the job and select Properties.

• Click the Properties icon in the Job Center toolbar.

• Click Properties in the Actions menu.

2 Click the Job Info icon in Job Properties.

3 Select the Override using server's die library checkbox in the Die printing section.

4 Choose other settings, as required.

5 Click Process and Hold.The job is processed and the three surfaces (Content, Die + content, and Die) are automatically generated.

You can open the job in Fiery ImageViewer to view each of the three surfaces.


Fiery Preview

39

Using XMP data for a die line

Jobs can have XMP (Extensible Metadata Platform) data embedded in them. When jobs that have embedded XMPdata, are imported into the Fiery server, the XMP data is retained as part of the job.





2 In the Fiery Preview window, click the Version Editor icon in the upper-right corner.

3 In the Version Editor window, click the Spot colors tab.The list of spot colors available in the image are listed in the tab.

4 In the Die Line section, click Select die line (pencil tip icon).

5 In the Select die line dialog, select Use XMP data for die line. Click OK.The die line that uses the embedded XMP data appears in the Die Line section.

6 Select the job in the Held list. Right-click and choose Process and Hold.

After the job is processed, you can open the job in ImageViewer to view the three surfaces that are generated. Thethree surfaces are Content, Die + content, and Die. The Die + content and Die surfaces are generated using the XMPdata.

Die line printing options

You can view and apply die line settings for the job in Job Properties > Job Info.The following settings are available.

Setting Description

Override using server's die library Selecting this check box enables the Fiery server to automatically detect thedie lines that are saved in the die library.

Note: The die lines are not printed on the sheets of the final product.

Print die line Selecting this check box enables printing of the die line and other die lineprint options listed in this section.

Print die line at: Specify when the die line sheets can be applied to the job. The options are:

• Before job

• After job


Fiery Preview

40

Setting Description

Die line content: Specify if the die sheets should contain only the die line content, or both thedie line and the printable content. The options are:

• Die line only

• Die line and content

Print die line to (if supported): Specify location of the job output. Choose the required output tray from thedrop-down menu.

Note: This option is available only if the press supports multiple outputtrays/deliveries.

Die line copies: Specify the number of copies to be printed with the die line.


Fiery Preview

41

Printing

Import jobs for printing

You can print files by importing them directly into Fiery server queues, or import jobs that have been archived toexternal locations (other than the Fiery server hard disk).

Importing jobs into the print queues

Print files by importing them directly to the Fiery server. You can import multiple jobs at a time and maintain theformat of the files.You can import multiple jobs at a time. Importing files to a queue is similar to printing through an application, butimporting files maintains the file format and does not convert the job into PostScript. You can import files bydragging and dropping them to

• Connected Fiery servers in the Servers list

• Processing queue

• Held queue

However, for the best control over how files import, use the Import icon in the Job Center toolbar, or the Import Jobin the File menu. You are immediately taken to the browse dialog on your computer. When files are selected, they aredisplayed in the Import Files dialog. In this dialog box, you can easily apply a workflow (server preset or virtualprinter) to files at the time of import. Generally, you cannot do this when you import files by dragging and dropping(the Servers list is the only exception to this rule).

1 Drag and drop files or folders from the computer to the Printing or Processing queue, or the Held list.The supported file types are PS, PDF, EPS, TIFF, PDF/VT, PPML, ZIP, and VPS.

Note: The PPML, ZIP, and VPS file types may not be supported for all Fiery servers.The Import Files dialog box does not display when you drag and drop files or folders to these locations. The entirecontents of folders are imported.

2 Drag and drop files to a connected Fiery server in the Servers list, Processing queue or Held list.The Import Files dialog box is opened. See step 5.

3 To import files directly from your computer, do one of the following:

• Click File > Import Job.

• Click the Import toolbar icon in Job Center.


Printing

42

4 In the browse dialog on your computer, select the files you want to upload.The Import Files dialog box is opened.


• Select Apply default settings to import files with attributes defined in the files. If a setting is not defined, thedefault setting on the Fiery server is used.

• Select Use Server Preset and then choose from a list of factory default presets or server presets that arecurrently published on the Fiery server.

• Select Use Virtual Printer and then choose from a list of virtual printers that are currently published on theFiery server.

The Use Server Preset and Use Virtual Printer options above only appear if server presets or virtual printers havebeen set up on the Fiery server.

6 Select a job action. For example:

• Hold (default)

• Process and Hold (default)

• Send to Press/Send to Print Queue/Send to Ready to Print

Other choices may appear based on the capabilities of the Fiery server.

Note: The last chosen action will be displayed.

Import jobs from external archives and Fiery server hard disk

Import jobs that have been archived to external locations, including the Fiery server hard disk.• Do one of the following:

• To manually import jobs, click File > Import Archived Job. Browse to the directory and select the foldercontaining the archived job. Select the job and then click OK.If the folder you want does not appear in the list, click Manage to browse to the directory to locate and add thefolder, and click OK.The imported job appears in either the Held or Printed queue.

• Select the file on your computer desktop and drag and drop it into the specified queue in CommandWorkStation.


Printing

43

Setting print options

The print options for a job are accessed from the Job Properties window.After a print job reaches the Fiery server, an operator can view or change these print options in the Job Propertieswindow of Command WorkStation. For example, an operator might do the following:

• View the job's print settings, including instructions to the operator

• Override settings

• Print a list of the current job properties to a local printer

View job properties

You can view or override the print options for a selected job in either in the Held, Printed or Archived queue.If you are an operator and have not changed any settings or print options for a job in Command WorkStation, theJob Properties window reflects all the job settings in an imported job.Jobs that are imported into Command WorkStation will show either the settings included with the job (forPostScript jobs and some JDF jobs) or the default job settings for the Fiery server (for PDF files or jobs importedwithout job information).For jobs that are currently in progress, you can view a read-only version of job properties. This includes jobs that areProcessing, Waiting to process, Printing, or Waiting to print. This allows you to verify properties of active jobswithout having to cancel the job.

View or override job properties

You can view or change the print options for a job.

Note: You can use inline editing in the Job Summary pane as another way to override job properties.

1 Double-click a job in the Held or Printed queue, or select the job and do one of the following:

• Right-click to select Properties.

• Click the Properties icon.

• Click Actions > Properties.

To select multiple jobs on a single Fiery server, use shift-click, ctrl-click (on Windows), or cmd-click (on Mac OSX); then click Properties. After the multiple jobs have opened, specifying a value in the Job Properties windowapplies it to all jobs by default. The Summary tab allows a side-by-side comparison of the print options formultiple jobs.

2 Click each icon to view the print options for the job properties group.For some options, changing the setting requires that the job be reprocessed.


Printing

44

3 If you want to override the print options, make the changes, and then click OK to save your override settings orselect Process and Hold, Send to Ready to Print, Send to Press, or Send to Printing Queue to save and send the jobwith your settings to the press for printing.

Note: The print action or queues listed may not be supported for all Fiery servers.Some settings cannot be applied instantly to jobs that are processed and held because the job needs to be re-processed to apply the settings.

View a summary of a job's existing print properties

The Job Properties window allows you to print a summary of a job’s current properties.1 In the Job Properties window, click the Summary icon.

2 To print a list of the job's existing properties, click Print Summary.

Note: For information about specific print options and settings and where to set them, see your Fiery serverdocumentation.

Job actions in the Job Properties window

You can use common job actions, such as Print, and Process and Hold, within the Job Properties window. Thedefault job action is Print.

Hold Causes the job to be spooled to the Fiery server until the operator takesfurther action. Held jobs can exist in a pre-processed or processed state.

Process and Hold Causes the Fiery server to queue the job to process and then return the jobto the Held queue. You can use this job action to preview any job beforeprinting it.

Send to Printing Queue Allows you to send the job to the press for printing.


Send to Ready to Print Allows you to send the job to the press for printing.


Print option categories

The Job Properties print options are grouped into categories for quick access.

Quick Access Contains duplicate print options from the other job properties groups. It iscustomizable, so most print options can be added or removed from the view.The Quick Access tab lets you find print options quickly without browsingthrough all of the Job Properties tabs.


Printing

45

Job Info All information about the job, including user information that may berequired for page range, proofing, and die printing.

Media Attributes and sources of substrate to print.

Layout Defines the image shift, image origin, mirror or rotate print options forpositioning and to compensate for finishing options.

Color Color settings and additional features (when optional color features areturned on).

Image All image quality settings supported by the connected Fiery server and press.

Finishing Print options related only to the finishing capabilities on the press.

VDP All Variable Data Printing (VDP) settings.

Summary A summary of the job's existing print properties.

Set defaults for all job properties

The Set Defaults feature allows you to customize the Fiery server by modifying the default job properties settings.After the Fiery server has been configured using Set Defaults, it determines the initial settings whenever creatingFiery Hot Folders, Virtual Printers, and Server Presets.Jobs imported to the Fiery server with Apply default settings selected in the Import Files dialog box, or dragged intothe Job Center will also inherit the current default settings as configured with the Set Defaults feature. Once the jobsare in the Fiery server queues, the job properties can be overridden.You can view or edit default settings for all job properties. To change the default job settings, including colorsettings, select Set Defaults. The Set Defaults feature can be accessed from the following areas:

• Device Center > Virtual Printers

• Device Center > Server Presets

• Device Center > Color Management

• Server > Set Defaults

Set Defaults opens the Default settings window where you can select the desired default settings for the Fiery server.These settings apply to the Print queue and Hold queue, and act as the defaults for future server presets or virtualprinters.

1 Click the More icon (vertical three dots) next to the name of the Fiery server, then select Set Defaults, or selectServer > Set Defaults.

2 In the Default settings window, set options individually and choose whether to lock the option or leave itunlocked.You can also choose to Lock All or Unlock All.

Note: To reset job properties to the settings before they were changed, click Reset.


Printing

46

3 Click OK.

Note: To back up the default settings, including color default settings, listed in Set Defaults, ensure you selectVirtual Printers in Fiery System Restore. For more information, see Back up Fiery server settings from CommandWorkStation (FS350 and earlier) on page 30.

Preset print settings

A preset is a collection of print settings in the Job Properties window that you can access at a later time.Server Presets can be accessed from Job Properties, and they can be applied to workflows such as Fiery Hot Foldersand Virtual Printers.Job presets are listed in the Presets drop-down menu in the Job Properties window. You can select one of the jobpresets from the list, or create a new preset based upon the current options selected in the Job Properties window. Ifa job is not currently using a preset, then the preset field is blank; no text appears in the Presets field. All propertiesdisplay the initial default settings. When you select a job preset, all settings are updated to reflect the saved preset. Ifyou change any print settings, the Presets list reverts to blank.There are three types of job presets:

• Local Presets – Saved on the user's local computer.Local Presets are available in the Presets list whenever you access the Fiery server. They remain on your localhard disk until you delete them.

• Server Presets – Saved on the Fiery server and shared with other users of the Fiery server.When you apply a Server Preset to a job, the preset settings become part of the job, and remain with the job untilyou modify them.If the Server Preset has locked print settings, you can override the print settings in the Job Properties windowafter you select it for the job. When it is overridden, the Presets field becomes blank.

• Default Server Presets – Installed factory presets on the Fiery server and shared with other users of the Fieryserver.

Applying presets

Job presets can be applied using one of the following methods:

• Import a job into Command WorkStation using File > Import Job or the Import toolbar icon in Job Center. Youcan select Use Server Preset and then select a preset from the list in the Import Files window.

• Select a job in the Held, Printed or Archived queue in Job Center and click the Properties toolbar icon. Select aLocal Preset or Server Preset from the Presets list.

• Right-click a job in the Held, Printed or Archived queue in Job Center, select Apply Workflow and then select apreset from the list.

• Select or right-click a job in the Held, Printed or Archived queue in Job Center. In the Job Summary pane, select aserver preset from the Workflow list.

Editing a preset

You can use inline editing in the Job Summary pane as another way to edit the preset


Printing

47

Create a Local or Server Preset

If you are an Administrator, you can create, edit, rename, unpublish, publish, and delete Server Presets in Server >Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets. You can save a Local Preset in the Job Properties window only.You create a Local Preset or Server Preset by choosing the settings in the Job Properties window, and then savingthem in the Presets list.Administrators can save a preset as a Local Preset or Server Preset. Operators can save only a Local Preset.

Create a local preset

Administrators and Operators can save settings in the Job Properties window as local presets.1 Double-click a job in the Held or Printed queue, or select the job and do one of the following:

• Right-click to select Properties.

• Click the Properties toolbar icon in Job Center.

• Click Actions > Properties.

2 Adjust the print settings for each tab as desired.

3 Under Presets, choose Save Preset.

4 Enter a descriptive name for the preset, and select Local Presets.

5 Click Save.

The Local Presets are available any time you access the Job Properties window. They remain on your local harddisk until you delete them.

Create a server preset

Administrators can save settings in the Job Properties window as server presets. These presets are saved on theFiery server and shared with its users.1 Click Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets.

2 Click New.

3 Enter a descriptive name for the preset.Spaces are not allowed in preset names.

4 Enter a description for the preset (optional).

5 Click Define to specify the job properties, and then click Save.

The Server Presets are available any time you access Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets or the JobProperties window. They remain on the Fiery server until an Administrator deletes them.


Printing

48

After a Server Preset is created, the Settings pane (located on the right side) shows the settings modified fromthe defaults, and locked settings. The Server Preset is published automatically so it can be shared with otherusers connected to the Fiery server.

Change presets for print jobs

You can choose a different preset to apply to all jobs. You can also edit or rename a preset, delete a local preset, orrevert to the default preset.You work with presets in the Job Properties window. To display it, double-click a job in the Held or Printed queue, orselect the job and click the Properties toolbar icon in Job Center.

Choose a different preset

You can change the current set of print options to another preset for a job.• Select any job from the Held queue and do one of the following:

• Right-click to select Properties. In the Job Properties window, under Presets, select a different preset.

The preset is used until you select another one, or make further changes to Job Properties.

Edit a preset

A preset includes most print options that you set in the Job Properties window. You can override a setting in theJob Properties window after choosing a preset.• To edit a preset, use one of the following methods:

• Apply a preset to a job, then edit the settings as required and click Save as preset. Type the same presetname as before, and select local or server preset.

• In Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets, select the preset from the list, and click Edit. Makethe required changes in the Job Properties window and then close to save the changes.

Delete a Local Preset

You can delete a local preset with the Manage Local Presets feature in the Job Properties window.1 In the Job Properties window, under Presets, select Manage Local Presets.

2 Select a preset and click Delete.


Printing

49

Rename a preset

You can rename a local preset with the Manage Local Presets feature in the Job Properties window.1 In the Job Properties window, under Presets, select Manage Local Presets.

2 Select a preset and click Rename.

3 Enter a descriptive name for the preset and click Save.

Revert to the default preset

You can apply the default preset to a job to revert the print options to the default settings of the Fiery server.You can apply the current defaults as configured by the Administrator with Set Defaults or Factory Default(previously known as Printer's Default).• When applying the default settings, do one of the following:

• To apply the current server default settings in the Job Properties window, under Presets, select Default.

• To apply the factory default settings in the Job Properties window, under Presets, select Factory Default.

For information about default job properties settings, see Set defaults for all job properties on page 46.

Server Presets

Server Presets provide a consistent set of printing options that all users can use. Users can save Local Presets to theircomputer, but only an Administrator can save, edit, publish, and delete Server Presets.Server Presets are accessible from:

• Command WorkStation (select Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets, and from the Propertiestoolbar icon in Job Center)

• Command WorkStation Job Properties (click the Properties toolbar icon in Job Center)

• Fiery Hot Folders (see Fiery Hot Folders Help)

• Virtual Printers (see Virtual printers on page 128)

An Administrator can create Fiery Hot Folders and virtual printers based on a Server Preset. Editing the ServerPreset also changes the settings for those Fiery Hot Folders and virtual printers.

Archived jobs with Server Presets

Archived jobs retain the job information and the preset name. When an archived job is restored to the same Fieryserver from which it was created, the Server Preset is shown in the Preset column header for any of the Job Centerqueues, such as the Processing and Printing queues.

Tracking edited presets

If a Server Preset was modified after it was applied to a held, printed, or archived job, the preset name is marked withan asterisk (*). In other words, the preset was edited by an Administrator since the job was submitted. To use thelatest settings, re-apply the preset to the job.


Printing

50

If the Preset column header was added to any of the Job Center queues (Printing, Processing, Held, Printed, orArchived), the asterisk and job name are displayed in the Preset column.

Edit, delete or unpublish Server Presets

You can edit, delete, or unpublish a server preset in Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets.You must be logged on to the Fiery server as Administrator to perform these operations.If you edit or delete a Server Preset that is currently being used, the changes will affect only future jobs. The changedpreset settings are applied instantly to any Fiery Hot Folders or virtual printers using the specified Server Preset.You can overwrite an existing Server Preset the same way you can overwrite files on a computer. A Server Preset canbe overwritten from Job Properties.Jobs already in the Held or Printed queue of the Fiery server do not automatically reflect edits made to the preset. Ifyou want to update any jobs in the queues of the Fiery server with a newly edited preset, you need to re-apply thepreset to the job using Job Properties.

Edit Server Presets

Administrators can edit server presets. You can edit Server Presets from within Command WorkStation(Server > Device Center > Workflows) or within Job Properties.1 To edit a preset from Device Center, select the preset you want to edit, and click Edit from the toolbar in

Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets.a) Enter a description for the change (optional).

b) Click Define to change the print settings.

c) Click OK.

2 To edit a preset from Job Properties, right-click a job in the Held or Printed queue, and select Job Properties.a) Select a server preset from the Presets list for the job.

b) Make any changes to Job Properties, which you wish to apply to the preset.

c) In the Presets list, select Save Preset, select Server Preset, and type the exact name for the preset.

d) Click Save, and then click OK to overwrite the existing preset.

Delete Server Presets

Administrators can delete server presets.1 Select a preset (unpublished or published) from the list and click Delete from the toolbar.

2 Click Yes.Any Fiery Hot Folders and virtual printers linked to the deleted preset will be disconnected. However, theywill preserve the settings of the deleted preset.


Printing

51

Unpublish Server Presets

An unpublished preset is not available for use in the Job Properties window. After you unpublish a Server Preset,you can publish it again.1 Select a Server Preset with the published icon from the list.

2 Click Unpublish in the toolbar.The preset is shown with the unpublished icon.

3 Click Yes.Any Fiery Hot Folders and virtual printers linked to the unpublished preset will be disconnected. However,they will preserve the settings of the unpublished preset.

About locked server presets

You can lock or unlock a server preset’s print settings in Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets.You must be logged on to Fiery server as Administrator to perform these operations.Locking a setting in a Server Preset ensures that:

• It is applied to all files imported to Command WorkStation using the preset.

• Fiery Hot Folders jobs also inherit the same locked settings (assuming the Fiery Hot Folders uses the ServerPreset).

• Virtual printers show the settings as locked. Client printer drivers connected to a virtual printer are unable tomodify the setting.

Locks apply only at the time of job submission. After the jobs are at the Fiery server, any locked setting can be editedin the Job Properties window of Command WorkStation.

Lock or unlock settings in Server Presets

You must be logged on to Fiery server as Administrator to lock or unlock print settings in Server > DeviceCenter > Workflows > Job Presets.

1 Select the preset you want to edit, and click Edit from the toolbar.

2 Enter a description for the change (optional).

3 Click Define to change the print settings.


• Click Lock All to lock all the print settings.

• Click the lock icon to lock a specific print setting.

• Click Unlock All to unlock all the print settings.

• Click the lock icon to change it to the unlock icon for a specific print setting.


Printing

52

5 Click OK.

Export and import Server Presets

You can export Server Presets to a file (Exported Presets.fjp) from one Fiery server, and then import the file onanother Fiery server of the same model and version in Server > Device Center > Workflows > Job Presets.You can also export Server Presets for safekeeping by using the Backup & Restore tool (Server > Device Center >General > Tools). Preset Backup files cannot be restored to a different model Fiery server.When importing a presets file, the new presets can be merged with existing ones, or can replace existing presets.You must be logged on to the Fiery server as Administrator to export and import Server Presets.

Export Server Presets

Administrators can export Server Presets for use on another Fiery server.1 Click Export from the toolbar.

2 Browse to a location to save the Exported Presets.fjp file.

3 Click Save.

Import Server Presets

After exporting Server Presets from one Fiery server, Administrators can import them for use on another similarFiery server.1 Click Import from the toolbar.

2 Choose Merge with existing or Replace existing.If the Server Presets are merged, the presets in the imported file are added to the existing presets on the Fieryserver. If there are any duplicate names, the imported presets will have a numeric suffix appended to the endof the preset name, such as FirstTest-1.If the Server Presets are replacing existing presets, all the current Server Presets are deleted and replacedwith the Server Presets contained in the newly imported Fiery Job Preset file.

3 Browse to the location of the Exported Presets.fjp file.

4 Click Open.

Set Defaults

The Set Defaults feature allows you to customize the Fiery server by modifying the default properties of a job.


Printing

53

Job Editor

Job Editor is used in the preprocessing workflow to preview and edit individual jobs before printing.

Note: Job Editor may not be supported for all Fiery servers.Job Editor is used to perform the following tasks:

• Create a step & repeat (pattern repeats)

• Scale jobs

• Flip and rotate jobs

• Position jobs on the substrate

• Select a job-specific substrate

• Define the print settings

Spooled jobs are listed in the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list. You can open a maximum of five jobssimultaneously in Job Editor. Each job is displayed on a separate tab in Job Editor.

Open Job Editor

In Job Editor, you can preview and edit any spooled or processed job in the Held list.• In Job Center, do one of the following:

• Right-click the job, and click Edit.

• Select the job and select Actions > Edit.

• Select the job and click the Edit icon in the toolbar.

• Double-click on the thumbnail image of the selected job.

The job opens in the Job Editor window.

Job Editor window

Job Editor allows you to preview and edit your job before printing.The menu bar provides the following menus:

• File: Options to save, process, and cancel jobs. You can also close Job Editor from this menu.

• Edit: Options to undo or redo a performed action. Select Measurement Unit to change the unit of measurementto temporarily override the default unit of measurement.

Note: You can specify the default unit of measurement from Job Center > Edit > Preferences > Region >Measurement units.


Printing

54

• View: Options to scale the view of the image. These viewing options also have corresponding icons in the lower-right corner of the window. Settings such as Snap To and Visual Aids that help with job alignment on thesubstrate are also available.

• Help: Opens the Fiery Command WorkStation Help.

The following tabs are available on the right of the Job Editor window:

• Job Info: Includes the Job Notes area where job-specific information can be captured.

• Layout: On the Step and Repeat panel, you can create multiple copies (clones) of a job and apply flip, offset,rotate and drop settings to design seamless repeat patterns required in the textile industry.

• Substrate: The Substrate Settings panel allows you to select a job-specific substrate that overrides the settingconfigured in Job Properties.

• Printer: On the Print Settings panel, you can specify the required number of print copies, a print length, or a printrange.

The toolbar provides the following controls:

• Save: Saves the job with its current settings.

• Transform tool: Activates the scaling, positioning, rotate, flip and margin settings.

• Crop tool: Activates the settings which enable you to select a focal point of an image and remove unwanted spacearound it.

• Pan tool: Moves the job around the window.

• Zoom tool: Zooms in and out.

• Undo: Cancels/reverts the last performed action.

• Redo: Performs/repeats the last undone action.

The status bar provides the following controls:

• Connected to: Displays the IP address of the connected Fiery server.

• Job Info: Provides a quick view of the details and settings specified for the job.

• Page navigation: Controls to navigate through the pages of the job.

• Scaling options: Scales the view to the required size.

Visual aids

Visual aids help align jobs on the substrate. Visual aids do not appear on the printed output of the job.The following visual aids are available:

• Rulers—Displays rulers along the top and left edges of the preview. You can change the unit of measurement inthe Edit menu.

• Guides—Are non-printable lines. You can lock guides at their current position.

• Grids—Displays horizontal and vertical lines that do not print. The grid spacing is fixed, but adapts automaticallyaccording to the selected zoom factor. Activating snapping causes nearby jobs to snap to the grid.

• Sheet Margins—Displays the non-printable margins as defined by the printer's firmware. By ensuring that jobsare within the non-printable margins, you can avoid unwanted cropping in the printout.


Printing

55

• Page Frame—Displays a black border around each job. This helps you to view the white space around a job andcheck whether it overlaps other jobs in a nesting layout.

• Mouse Tracker—Displays the current cursor position as x/y coordinates.

Show visual aids

You can show or hide visual aids in the preview window.• Click View > Visual Aids, and then click an item.

Set ruler coordinates

By default, the ruler’s 0, 0 coordinates are located at the upper left corner of the sheet. You can move the 0, 0coordinates—for example, to the corner of a job.• Drag the pointer from the top left corner of the ruler area to the required position.

You can reset the 0, 0 coordinates by double-clicking the ruler intersection area.

Work with guides

Guides are nonprintable lines that help you to position jobs at exact coordinates on the substrate. You can lockguides at their current position.• Do any of the following:

• Create a guide: Drag the pointer from the horizontal or vertical ruler.

• Move a guide: Drag the guide to a new position.

• Remove a guide: Drag horizontal guides to the horizontal ruler and vertical guides to the vertical ruler.

Turn on snapping

You can assign some visual aids a magnetic property, which causes jobs in their proximity to snap to them. You canapply snapping to grids or guides.• Click View > Snap to, and then click an item.

Editing jobs

In Job Editor, you can scale, crop, rotate, flip, and realign jobs on the substrate. Visual aids are available in thepreview window to help you position jobs exactly.

Note: The settings you make in Job Editor override the default settings of the same name made in Job Properties.


Printing

56

Scale a job

You can scale jobs by a percentage, by typing new dimensions, or by dragging. You can also scale jobs to the mediawidth or height.Jobs that do not fit on the media are indicated by a red border. To print oversize jobs, you must scale them down.By default, scaled jobs retain their original proportions. You can deactivate proportional scaling by clicking theProportional button in the toolbar.

1 On the toolbar, select the Transform Job tool.


• Scale freely: Rest the pointer on a corner of the job. The pointer changes into a double-headed arrow. Drag thejob to the required size.

• Scale by typing dimensions: In the toolbar, under Scale, type a width and height.

• Scale by any percentage: In the toolbar, under Scale, click the % button, and type a percentage in the width orheight box.

• Scale by a default scaling factor: Right-click the job, click Scale and click an item. The following scaling factorsare available: 10%, 25%, 50%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%.

• Scale to media width: Right-click the job, and click Fit to Width. The job is scaled proportionally to theprintable width of the substrate.

Align a job on the sheet

You can align a job to the sheet edge, or you can reposition a job by adding margins, by typing x/y coordinates, or bydragging.By default, the job is positioned in the top, left-hand corner of the sheet, while taking the printer margins intoaccount.

1 On the toolbar, select the Transform Job tool.


• On the toolbar, under Position, type x/y coordinates for the top, left-hand corner of the page.By default, Job Editor displays the x/y coordinates of the printer’s non-printable left and top margins. You canmake Job Editor ignore the printer margins by typing x/y values of “0”.

• On the toolbar, under Align, click a horizontal and vertical alignment type.

• On the toolbar, under Margin, type a top, bottom, left, or right margin width (step and repeat only).You can apply identical margins to all four sides by clicking the Link all Margins button, and defining a topmargin only.


Printing

57

Rotate a job

You can rotate jobs by 90, 180, or 270 degrees.1 On the toolbar, select the Transform Job tool.


• On the toolbar, click Rotate Clockwise or Rotate Counterclockwise. The job is rotated by 90 degrees in theselected direction.

• Rest the pointer near, but not directly on, a page corner until the pointer changes into an arrowed circle. Then,drag in the direction you want to rotate. The job snaps to 0 degrees, 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees,whichever is nearest.

Flip a job

You can flip a job along its horizontal or vertical axis.1 On the toolbar, select the Transform Job tool.

2 On the toolbar, click Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical.

Crop a job

You can enhance the focal point of an image, by removing distracting background elements around it.1 On the toolbar, select the Crop Job tool.

2 In the preview, drag the pointer to select the section that you want to crop.You can cancel the selected cropped area by pressing ESC.

3 Fine-tune the selected section (optional), by doing any of the following:

• Reposition the crop box: Hold down ALT, and drag the pointer from the center of the crop box.

• Resize the crop box: Drag the edge of the crop box.

• Adjust the margin widths between the edge of the job and the crop box: In the toolbar, type new marginwidths.

4 Press ENTER.You can return a cropped job to its original state by clicking the Reset Crop button in the toolbar.

Step and repeat

A step and repeat consists of one rapport file and multiple copies (clones) that are arranged on the substrate tocreate a seamless pattern repeat for textile printing.You can create a step and repeat from single-page jobs, but not from multi-page jobs.


Printing

58

Create a step and repeat

You can create multiple copies (clones) of a job and use the flip, offset/drop, and rotate settings to create a seamlesspattern repeat.Before you begin: Make all job settings before you create a step and repeat. You cannot modify the original job afteryou have created a step and repeat. If you want to modify the original job, you must delete all the copies first.

1 In Job Editor: On the Layout tab, expand the Step and Repeat panel. In the panel header bar, select the check boxto activate the settings.If you cannot activate the settings, make sure that the job width is less than the substrate width. You cannotcreate a step and repeat from a job that is equal to or wider than the width of the selected substrate. In this case,either scale the job down, or select a wider substrate.

2 Under Offset/Drop, define the amount of horizontal or vertical shift. Do one of the following:

• Drop size: Select the amount of drop as a fraction of the image width or height. As an example, 1/1 equals noshift, 1/2 equals a 50% shift, and 1/4 equals a 25% shift.

• Percentage (%): Type the required amount of drop as a fraction of the image width or height if you do not wantto use one of the fixed drop sizes.

• Custom: Type the required amount of vertical or horizontal drop in the unit of measurement selected for JobEditor.

3 Under Repeat size, select the required number of horizontal and vertical copies.

• In a vertical direction, you can:

• Fill the media width

• Type the number of repeats

• Define a custom width

• In a horizontal direction, you can:

• Type the number of repeats

• Define a custom height

4 Click Save.

Modify a step and repeat

To modify a step and repeat, you must first delete all the copies (clones).1 In Job Editor: On the Layout tab, expand the Step and Repeat panel. In the panel header bar, clear the check box

to deactivate the settings.

2 Make your required changes to the original image.

3 In the panel header bar, reselect the check box to activate the settings.


Printing

59

Select a substrate

You can override the default substrate selected in Properties, either by selecting a different substrate from theSubstrate Catalog, or by defining a new custom substrate size.• Under Substrate Catalog, do one of the following:

• Select a default substrate from the Substrate Catalog.

• Select Non-defined. Then, under Substrate size, click Add (+), type a name and the required substrate width.

The size of the substrate after post-treatment (heating, washing) is displayed for your reference. You canconfigure the amount of size correction that is needed due to shrinkage or stretch in Job Properties.

Print from Job Editor

You can print an edited job or a step and repeat directly from Job Editor. The available settings vary depending onwhether you are printing a single-page job, a multi-page job, or a step-and-repeat job.Before printing, make sure that you have saved your changes.

1 In Job Editor: On the Printer tab, expand the Print Settings panel.


• Single-page job: Type in the number of required copies.

• Step-and-repeat job: Do one of the following:

• Select Copies, and type in the number of required copies. One copy is equal to the repeat size configured onthe Step and Repeat panel.

• Select Print length, and type in the length of substrate to be printed.

• Select Range, and type in the range of page numbers to be printed.

• Multi-page job: Do one of the following:

• Select Copies, and type in the number of required copies.

• Select Range, and type in the range of page numbers to be printed. Type individual page numbers inascending order and separated by commas, or type a range of pages separated by a hyphen.


• Select File > Process and Hold.

• Select File > Rush Process and Hold.

• Select File > Send to Ready to Print

Jobs are displayed in Job Center in the corresponding queue.


Printing

60


• Processed and held jobs: Select the job and select Actions > Send to Ready to Print. At the press software,retrieve the job for printing.

• Ready to print jobs: At the press software, retrieve the job for printing.

If multiple jobs are ready for printing, rushed jobs go straight to the front of the print queue in the press software.

Remove raster data from a job

Raster data is automatically removed from a job if you choose an action for which it is necessary (for example, tochange a job property that requires reprocessing).Raster data is generated and linked with a job that is processed or processed and held.When you select a processed job and choose Process and Hold, the raster is automatically removed so the job willopen as a spooled job. Choosing Remove Raster is not necessary, unless you want to save disk space.

This icon indicates a processed job with raster data.

This icon indicates a spooled job without raster data.If you must remove the raster data manually, follow the steps below.

1 Select the processed or held job in the Held list.


• Right-click to select Remove Raster.

• Click Actions > Remove Raster.

Determining the last printed page

If a job has been canceled or has failed to print successfully, you can determine the last printed sheet, so that you canreadily resume printing the job.1 In Command WorkStation, right-click anywhere in a column heading.

2 Select Add New > Other > Number of Pages Printed.This information also appears on the Job Log.


Printing

61

Managing jobs

Search for jobs

Search for and locate jobs on a connected Fiery server using search parameters, such as job title, user or date.The Search function allows you to quickly locate jobs on the currently selected Fiery server. It is part of the JobCenter tool bar and applies to the jobs in the current view. Search for jobs in the Held, Printed, Archived, Processing,or Printing queues.You can search for jobs doing one of the following:

• Simple job search - To do a basic search of the content for all the columns in the current view, even if thecolumns are not visible on screen (because of the scroll bar), use the Search field. For example, if you type“Letter,” you can find jobs that have the word “Letter” in the job title, and also jobs that have “Letter” as part ofthe media name in the Output paper size column.

• Advanced job search - To search by multiple criteria (columns) simultaneously, click the arrow next to themagnifying glass icon and select Advanced Search. The Advanced Search window displays the current set ofcolumns and allows searching only across these columns.

Simple job search

You can use the Search field in any view to find jobs. When you switch from one view to another, the previous searchcriteria are cleared.1 Type your search criteria in the Search field located above the Job Center toolbar icons.

2 Press Enter or click the magnifying glass icon (Search icon) to locate the jobs that meet the specified searchcriteria.The typed text is not case-sensitive.The search for the specified value is conducted across all the columns in the current view, even if the columns arenot visible on screen (because of the scroll bar).

3 After you have executed a search, you can clear the current search criteria by clicking Clear or switching toanother view. This allows you to search by different criteria.


Managing jobs

62

Advanced job search

You can use the Advanced Search function to search by multiple criteria (columns) simultaneously in the currentview.1 To search for jobs, do one of the following: Click the arrow next to the magnifying glass icon and select Advanced

Search.

2 Select the search criteria and click OK to locate the jobs that meet the specified search parameters.To save a view that displays all the jobs in all queues on the selected Fiery server, do not select any search criteria,only click OK.

3 Click Save Search to save the search results as a filter or view.

4 Select one of the following:

• Filter (Current view) to save the search criteria as a filter for the current view (see Filter a job list on page 63).

• View (All jobs) to save the search criteria as a view and give it a descriptive name.

Note: The view will be listed under the default queues for the selected Fiery server in the Servers list.If you saved a view for all jobs on the selected Fiery server, type a descriptive name, such as "All jobs".

5 Click OK to save the search filter or view.You can create up to 10 custom views.

Viewing job thumbnails

Thumbnail view displays previews of the first page of each processed job to help you visually identify the job.• Click the icon in the upper-right corner of the Job Center toolbar .

• To sort the jobs, right-click anywhere in a blank area of the background (in other words, not on a job), and selectthe sort criteria and sort order (ascending or descending).

• You can use common keyboard shortcuts for selecting multiple jobs and for copying and pasting.

• To view additional job information, move your mouse over the thumbnail icon of the job.

Filter a job list

You can filter current views to display only jobs that match specific attributes.In the default queues and custom views, and in the Job Log, each column displays an attribute of the job. You canfilter the job list to restrict the display to only jobs that match specified values for one or more attributes.You can specify different filters for different job lists and servers. Filters remain until you change them or deletethem.


Managing jobs

63

1Click and select Create Filter.

2 Specify the search criteria and click OK.

3 Click Save Search to save the search results.

4 Select Filter (Current view), type a descriptive name for the view, and click OK.

5Click and select a filter for the current view.Optionally, click Edit to type or select a value in one or more additional fields to further restrict the list.

6 You can manage the filtered views as follows:

• Click Clear to clear the applied filter for the current view and display all jobs in the list.

• Click Delete to completely remove the filter.

Using the Completed view

The Completed view lists all jobs in the Fiery server which have been printed, regardless of the location of the job.For example, a job sent to Print and hold will be displayed in the Hold queue and the Completed view. After the jobis deleted from the Hold queue, it will also disappear from Completed view, and vice versa.Jobs that are canceled while printing or that have errors are not displayed in Completed view.This view is added by default, but can be hidden by selecting the Completed view and then clicking the Hide buttonabove the toolbar. After the Completed view has been hidden, it can be re-enabled by selecting Server > ShowCompleted View.

Export Current View

In any of the views in Command WorkStation, you can export the current job list view as a text file. This text filecontains all the information displayed onscreen, including the contents of columns added to that view from the usualqueues Printed, Held, etc.), as well as from custom views that you create by filtering.Create the view by adding columns, removing columns, and filtering jobs.

1 Select File > Export Current View.

2 Select the format of the text file.


Managing jobs

64

Move jobs to another queue

You can move or drag jobs to the Processing queue from the Held and Archived queues.• Select any job from the Held or Archived queue, click Actions, and then select an action such as one of the

following:

Note: The job actions available for the connected press are shown.

• Hold - Sends a job to the Held queue.

• Process and Hold - Processes a job but does not print it.

• Archive - Archives the job to the Archived queue.

You can also select a job in one of the queues and drag it into another queue.

Send jobs to another Fiery server

With the Send To command, you can transfer jobs to another connected Fiery server.When you transfer a job to an identical Fiery server model and version, raster data is transferred (if available). Whenyou transfer a job to a different Fiery server, only the source file is transferred, not the raster data; jobs need to bereprocessed on the target Fiery server before printing. When transferring a job, review and re-specify, if necessary, alljob properties, because non-identical Fiery servers may behave differently.


• Select any held job in the Job Center and drag it to another Fiery server in the Servers list.

• Select any held job in the Job Center and click Actions > Send To.

• Right-click any held job in the Job Center and select Send To.

2 Select a Fiery server.The job is transferred to the selected server.

Archive jobs

Archiving jobs stores jobs with their settings for later use, which allows you to reprint the job quickly without havingto import and set up the job again. You can save raster images so that the job can be printed again without having toreprocess it. Archive jobs can be stored in any folder that your computer can access, such as a network folder or alocal folder, and can be backed up with your other files.


Managing jobs

65

Archiving jobs with Archive Manager

Archive Manager moves archived jobs from the Fiery server to a folder that you choose, ensuring jobs are preservedeven if the Fiery server is upgraded or reloaded.

• Simple and safe archiving solution for all your Fiery server jobs

• Archive jobs outside of the Fiery server

• Share archive jobs easily across more than one Fiery server

• Share archives with multiple Command WorkStation users

• Find archived jobs faster, even when the Fiery server is offline

• List all archived jobs in one view

After you archive jobs with Archive Manager, the Archived queue is no longer listed under the name of the Fieryserver. Instead, all archived jobs will be available in this Archive Manager window.

First-time setup with Archive Manager

1 In the upper-left corner of Command WorkStation, click Archive Manager.

2 Click Get started.

3 Click Browse and select a location where Archive Manager will store the archived jobs, and then click SelectFolder.

4 Type a descriptive name for the location in the Display name field.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Migrate.

7 In the Migrate archive jobs window, ensure that the source locations are valid.For more information, see Folders inaccessible during migration on page 67.The locations at the top half of the window are the source location and folders where archived jobs are currentlystored. The single location that you select at the bottom half of the window is the destination in Archive Managerwhere the jobs will be moved. Moving jobs to the new location allows them to be managed by Archive Manager,backed up for safekeeping with other files and folders, and preserved even if the Fiery server is reloaded orupgraded.

8 Click Migrate.If the Fiery server has jobs remaining to be migrated (because the operation was skipped or canceled), CommandWorkStation will still display the Archive queue. To resume the migration process, click the blue Migrate buttonon the Archived queue.

Archive jobs with Archive manager

Migrating jobs is a one-time event. After you have migrated jobs to an archive folder, you can archive subsequentjobs to the same location or to another location.


Managing jobs

66


• Select any job in the Held or Printed queue and drag it to Archive Manager.

• Select any job in Job Center and click Actions > Archive.

• Right-click any job in Job Center and click Archive.

2 Choose an archive location.You can choose to preserve thumbnails and previews, if available.

Note: This increases the file size of the archived files.

3 To specify another location, click Edit Locations, and click Add in the Manage Locations window. Browse to thefolder where you want to archive the job and click Select Folder.

Understand archived jobs

An archived job contains the original source file that was received by the Fiery server, along with the job properties(the job ticket) that were set for the job.Job tickets may reference server-based resources such as color profiles, entries for Paper Catalog (or SubstrateCatalog), and calibration settings. Although these server resources are not saved with the archived file, the job ticketrefers to them. If the job ticket points to a resource that is no longer available, the job will use the default settings forthat resource.Archives contain server-specific information and settings, which are fully applied only when you restore the job tothe same server from which the job was created. You can restore or import an archive job to a different server. If theserver is a different model, the job ticket settings that are common to both servers will be retained, and other settingsthat are not present will be replaced by the server default settings.When you archive a job, you can save thumbnails and previews of processed jobs, which also saves the raster imagesof the job, so that the job does not need to be processed later. Preserving thumbnails and previews increases the filesize of the archived files.

Folders inaccessible during migration

If a location is not available, jobs cannot be migrated with Archive Manager.

• Verify that the folder is available on your computer or network. Locations may be unavailable because the folderhas been renamed, moved or deleted.

• Verify that you have read/write access. Archive Manager relies on your computer operating system to handleauthentication. Try to open the folder in Windows Explorer or the macOS Finder.

• Locations on other computers may be listed as a familiar path such as C:\users\admin\desktop, but the path maybe to another user's computer. To access these jobs, use Command WorkStation on the other computer toaccess the job.


Managing jobs

67

Manage archive locations

1 In the upper-left corner of Command WorkStation, click the Settings icon in the Jobs pane, above ArchiveManager.

2 Click the icon for the action that you want to perform.

Add Click Add to add a folder of existing archived jobs into Archive Manager,or to store archive jobs in the future.

Remove Removes the location.

Edit You can change only the display name of the folder, not the location. Ifthe folder has been moved, add it again as a new folder.

Set as default Makes that location the default location where jobs are archived.

Share archives

Archive Manager folders can be on the network, a cloud replication service, or your local computer. Back up archivefolders in the same manner that you would use for any other file or folder.To share archives over the network, use a network folder that all users can access. Open this folder first on yourcomputer to make sure it is available. On each computer that uses Command WorkStation, add this network folderas an Archive Manager location. Ask your network administrator to back up the Archive Manager network folder.Archive jobs can be shared with more than one Fiery server. For example, you can use a job archived from Fieryserver #1 on Fiery server #2. If both are of the same model and version, all job properties are retained. If thedestination Fiery server is a different model or version, the raster images are discarded (if present), and you will needto process the job again before printing. Any job properties that are not available on the destination Fiery server willnot be used. Verify the properties of the job before printing.

Search archived jobs

You can search all archived jobs by title, user name, media size or any other information that is displayed in thecolumns.1 In the upper-left corner of Command WorkStation, click Archive Manager.

2 In the search box, type the search criteria.Archive Manager displays the first 50 jobs. To display more jobs, click the > and >> buttons.To display more attributes about jobs, right-click the column header and add the column.


Managing jobs

68

Use archived jobs

After you have archived a job, you can use it as if it were still on the Fiery server.1 In the upper-left corner of Command WorkStation, click Archive Manager.

2 In the All Locations menu in the upper-left corner of the window, select All Locations or a specific location.A maximum of 50 jobs is displayed. To see more jobs, use the arrows in the upper-right corner of the job list.

3 Right-click the job and choose the action that you want to perform on the archived job.If more than one Fiery server is connected, you can also select the Fiery server to which you want to send the job.To ensure that you retain all the job properties, select the same Fiery server from which the job was archived,which is listed in the column Source server.

Disable Archive Manager

• Do one of the following actions.a) From Edit > Preferences > Archive Manager, clear Enable Archive Manager.

b) From the introduction screen, click No thanks.

If you disable Archive Manager after migration, the migrated jobs remain in the locations/folders used by ArchiveManager. To use these archived jobs, select File > Import Archived Job and browse to the location of the folder.

Archive jobs without Archive Manager

Archive jobs internally to the Fiery server hard disk or externally to removable media or networked drives.After you archive a job, it appears in the Archived queue of Job Center.


• Select any job in the Held or Printed queue and drag it to the Archived queue.

Note: You cannot drag jobs from a computer to the Archived queue. You can only drag jobs to the Archivedqueue if they are already on the Fiery server

• Select any job in Job Center and click Actions > Archive.

• Right-click any job in Job Center and click Archive.


• Select Set Defaults in the directories list.

• You can choose to preserve thumbnails and previews, if available.

Note: This increases the file size of the archived files.


Managing jobs

69

• You can choose to always prompt for archive locations and options.

• To specify another location, click Add. Browse to the folder to which you want to archive the job and clickSelect Folder.

3 Click OK to archive the job.

4 At any time, access Archive Settings from the Server menu or click the More icon next to the server name in theServers list.You can edit archive settings even if you previously cleared the check box Always prompt for archive locations.

Clear Server

Clear Server allows you to clear various types of jobs, logs, and VDP resources from the Fiery server in order to makespace available. Clear Server is available under the Server menu in Command WorkStation.

Note: This operation cannot be undone.

Drag and drop file management

Move files around with drag and drop functionality.You can drag and drop files into a number of different regions. This functionality gives you the ability to move filesfrom a computer to Command WorkStation. This is an ease-of-use feature for file management and job workflow.The following areas support drag and drop from your computer to Command WorkStation:

• Held queue (when in focus in the main window)

• Processing queue (when in focus in the main window)

• Held queue of any connected Fiery servers in the Servers list

• Processing pane at the top of Job Center

The following areas support drag and drop within Command WorkStation:

• Held queue

• Processing queue

• Archive Manager

• Archived queue

• Between servers in the Servers list using the Send To command (Actions > Send To)

Note: You must be logged on to two Fiery servers.

• Processing pane at the top of Job Center


Managing jobs

70

Estimate ink usage

With Command WorkStation, you can estimate the cost of ink that will be used for jobs, as well as the volume of inkand the area coverage. Estimates are provided only for processed jobs that have associated raster data.

Set cost and job columns

1 Log in as administrator.

2 From the Server menu, select Ink Estimation Settings.The window shows all colorants that are supported by the Fiery server, not just those that are currently installedor configured on the connected printer.

3 Choose a currency symbol.

4 Click the Edit icon (pencil) next to a name and enter the cost.You must enter a value to receive a cost estimate. To obtain the latest cost, contact your vendor. To receive anestimate of specialty colorants, enter only the costs of the colorants for which you are paying separately. Anycolorants that are already included, such as by a maintenance contract, can be entered as zero.

5 Click OK.

6 To add the relevant columns to Job Center, right-click any column header in the Job List and select the columnsthat you want (Estimated Cost, Estimated Volume, Estimated Coverage).Estimated Coverage is based on input document size.

Estimate costs

1 Select a processed job in the Job List.If the job is not processed, right-click it and select Process and Hold.For the estimate to be correct, you must use the same job property settings that will be used when the job isprinted.

2 Right-click the job and choose Estimate Ink, or select the job and choose Actions > Estimate Ink.While a job is being estimated, a progress bar shows the progress of the estimate next to the job title in the Heldlist.

3 To cancel an estimate in progress, right-click the job and choose Cancel cost estimation, or click the X in theprogress bar.

4 To view the completed estimate, do one of the following:

• View the Estimated Ink column in the job list.

• Click the Details link at the bottom of the Job Summary pane.

• Right-click the job and select Ink Estimation Details.


Managing jobs

71

• Select Actions > Ink Estimation Details.

• For completed, printed jobs, add the columns to the Job Log.

5 To view completed estimates for all the jobs in the job list, select File > Export Current View, and save the file toyour computer.

Change the number of copies after the estimate

If you change the number of copies for a job after the cost estimate is complete, the estimated cost is updatedautomatically.

Change cost or job properties after the estimate

If you change the cost after the estimate, the job must be re-processed and re-estimated. If you change the jobproperties (except the number of copies) after an estimate in such a way that the job requires reprocessing, thecurrent estimate is cleared and you must request a new estimate.


Managing jobs

72

Fiery JDF Jobs

About Fiery JDF and JMF

Fiery JDF adds support for various JDF intent and process elements. You can use Command WorkStation to viewJDF settings and resolve errors, such as media mismatch, during job processing.Job Definition Format (JDF) is an open standard, XML-based file format that allows you to automate the printproduction process by passing data between different applications. By simplifying data exchange, JDF makes digitalproduction faster and more efficient, while also facilitating faster movement of job details. A JDF electronic ticketspecifies how a job is to be handled and produced from customer concept to final production.Think of the JDF file as an electronic version of a customer’s specifications for a particular job. For instance, a jobticket with the customer’s request for a job with the specifications “100 copies of a 10-page document on 20# letter-size white paper, printed duplex, black-and- white” would be represented in a standardized XML format readable byJDF-enabled devices, in other words, the JDF ticket.Job Messaging Format (JMF) is the communication protocol used in a JDF workflow. JMF messages containinformation about events (start, stop, error), status (available, offline, and so on), results (count, waste, and so on).Fiery JDF turns on integrated, bi-directional communication of JDF intent or JDF process job tickets between JDF-submitting applications a Fiery server using JMF.Support for JMF allows the Fiery server to provide feedback on the status of the JDF job and production data (such astime of delivery/printing and materials used) to the JDF-submitting application.

Fiery JDF Setup

Fiery JDF must be turned on in Configure (Job Submission > JDF Settings) to allow JDF jobs to be submitted to theFiery server. You can specify JDF parameters when you configure the Fiery server.

• Use Job settings from virtual printer - Select a virtual printer, if desired.

• Job action - Choose from Hold, Process and Hold, Send to Ready to Print, or Send to Printing Queue.

• Override JDF job with the above settings - Override settings specified in the JDF job ticket.

• Job Closing - Specify Auto Close or Manual Close to close JDF jobs back to the emitter after they are printed.

• Required for Closing - Specify what information is required for closing.

• Common Global Paths - Add, edit, or remove file search paths over SMB for common resources.

For information about how to specify JDF settings in Configure, see Configure Help.


Fiery JDF Jobs

73

Enabling JDF-submitting applications

Fiery JDF contains an enablement mechanism to test and certify JDF-submitting applications. The specific JDF-submitting applications are turned on for Fiery JDF either in the Fiery server or by a JMF (Job Messaging Format)message sent from the JDF-submitting application.If a JDF-submitting application has not been turned on, the following indicators alert users to jobs from applicationsnot yet tested and supported:

• A warning status message is displayed for the job in the Command WorkStation job list.

• A warning message is displayed in the JDF Details window.

• A JMF comment is returned to the JDF-submitting application with information on how to certify theapplication.

Fiery JDF workflow

When a job is processed, the Fiery server uses JMF (JDF's Job Messaging Format) to send back status and auditinformation to the JDF job-submitting application.When a JDF job is submitted to the Fiery server, the job is checked for any errors or conflicts. If there are none, theoperator can select additional print actions from the Actions menu in Command WorkStation, or choose to print thejob directly.When an error is found, the job is shown with an error in the Job Status column.You can choose to fix or ignore JDF ticket conflicts in the Job Errors window. If a conflict is ignored, the job mayprint but with missing JDF information.After a JDF job is printed, a job completion message is automatically returned to the submitting application if theFiery server has been configured for Auto Close. For Manual Close, the operator needs to close the job through theCommand WorkStation window after the job has finished printing.

Submit the JDF job

You can submit a JDF ticket through a Hot Folder filter or traditional JDF-submitting application using the JMF URLof the Fiery server.1 Send a job to a Fiery server from a JDF-submitting application.

2 The job is sent through JMF (Job Messaging Format). The submitting application sends the job to the JMF URLof the Fiery server.

3 Enter the JMF URL of the Fiery server in the following format:http://<host>:<port> (for example, http://192.168.1.159:8010)


Fiery JDF Jobs

74

Display JDF column headings in Command WorkStation

When a JDF job has been received by the Fiery server and displayed in the Command WorkStation Held or Printedqueue, you can select a JDF set of column headings to display useful information about the JDF job.• To display column headings for a JDF job, right-click in the column heading bar and select JDF Set.

The default JDF set of headings is added. Right-click in the column heading bar and click Add New > JDF to seeadditional JDF categories.

Fiery JDF jobs and virtual printers

Virtual printers can be defined on the Fiery server and referenced inside a JDF ticket as a NamedFeature.In Fiery JDF Setup, you can specify a virtual printer for job submission. The job would then use the job settings inthat virtual printer, if so configured in the Fiery server (in the JDF section of Configure). Any settings in the JDFticket override the “unlocked” virtual printer settings.For more information about virtual printers, see Virtual printers on page 128.

Specify JDF settings for a job

You can set options for a JDF job in the JDF Settings window when you select a JDF job in the Held or Printed queue.• To open the JDF Settings window, right-click and select JDF Settings or click Actions > JDF Settings.

The following tabs are available from the JDF Settings window:

• Media - Displays the media attributes of the JDF job next to the corresponding Substrate Catalog entry. Mediafor the JDF job can be mapped manually to a Substrate Catalog entry in this tab. See Enabling JDF-submittingapplications on page 74.

• Job Info - Displays information found in the JDF ticket. Allows you to specify additional MIS details and addcomments.

• Run List - Displays the customer-supplied files used to generate the content of the JDF job. Allows you to add,edit, and reorder the files in the window.

• Close Job - Allows the job to be manually closed by the operator.

The following actions are available in every tab:

• Close Job - Closes the job, according to the parameters set in Configure.

• View Paper Ticket - This option is turned on if the JDF-submitting application included a human-viewable copyof the original job ticket.

• OK - Saves the settings and closes the window.

• Cancel - Closes the window without saving any changes to settings.


Fiery JDF Jobs

75

Job Info tab

The Job Info tab displays JDF information about the job being submitted.The Job name, Job ID, and Source fields are automatically populated.The following areas are automatically populated and are read-only:

• Job Header

• Scheduling

• Customer Info

MIS Details

The MIS Details area allows you to select a setting from the menu for each of the following categories:

• Chargeable - Specifies if the job should be charged.

• Work Type - Specifies if and how the job should change.

• Work Type Details - Specifies the reason for the change. Certain values of Work Type Details are valid only withcertain values of Work Type. For example, if Work Type is set to Original, then Work Type Details is ignored.

• Operation Mode - Specifies the type of operation mode.

Comments

The Comments area is populated with JDF comments as read-only, but you can add comments by clicking the Addbutton and typing your comments in the blank field.The comments appear in the Job notes area in the Job Info tab of the Job Properties window.

Run List tab

The Run List tab displays the location of the PDL files used to generate the content page artwork to populate a JDFjob. The file paths are displayed in the order that they are pulled to print the job. Each path supports one file type perjob. Different protocols are supported.

• Supported protocols: HTTP, FTP, SMB, MIME, local files

• Supported file types: PDF, PostScript, PPML, VDP, ZIP

Note: Multiple file types are not supported for the same job. If your first entry is connecting to a PDF file, then allfiles for the job should be PDF.You can add paths, edit the path names, or remove the path.

Note: You cannot remove validated paths that are required for the job from the Run List. At least one valid entry isrequired for a job.If the JDF ticket has the file names, but the files cannot be located in the path defined in Configure, an alert icon isdisplayed. You can then select Edit and insert the correct path.


Fiery JDF Jobs

76

Close Job tab

When Manual Close is turned on in Configure, the operator must close jobs in order for the submitting applicationto receive production information on the job, even if the job was canceled.Other users can close jobs to record and return the actual completion status of the job to the sender. Print MISSolution users receive production status during the run, and receive audit detail for costing when the job is closedout of the Fiery server.You can close a job manually at any time during the Fiery JDF workflow, provided that any required information hasbeen provided.In Fiery JDF Setup, you specify either auto or manual closing for jobs, and what information, if any, is required toclose a job.The Close Job tab displays the following fields, which are automatically populated:

• Substrate Catalog - Lists the media specified in the JDF ticket. You can change this entry if a different media wasused.

• Employee ID - Comes from the login the user used when logging in to Command WorkStation.

• Media Product ID - Refers to the Product ID in Substrate Catalog.

• Planned Sheets - Comes from the JDF ticket.

• Actual Sheets - Comes from the Fiery server Job Log.

You can override the entries for these fields if required, except for Media Product ID and Planned Sheets.

Add JDF job media to the Substrate Catalog

When a JDF ticket is submitted to the Fiery server, the server attempts to automatically map the specified media forthe JDF job with a corresponding entry in the Substrate Catalog on the Fiery server.If automatic media mapping fails, you can view the JDF job media in the JDF ticket and manually select a SubstrateCatalog media entry for the job.

1 If you want to add the media used in the JDF job, select it from the JDF ticket and add it to the Substrate Catalogin the Media tab of the Job Properties window.

2 Select Add/Map to Substrate Catalog from the Map to Substrate Catalog menu.

For general information about adding new media to the Substrate Catalog, see Create a Substrate Catalog entry onpage 139.


Fiery JDF Jobs

77

Resolve media conflicts in JDF jobs

If a JDF ticket uses media that cannot be automatically mapped to the Substrate Catalog, Command WorkStationdisplays an error for the job. You can add the media for the JDF job to the Substrate Catalog to resolve the problem,either by mapping it to an existing media entry or adding it as a new entry.1 Right-click the selected JDF job and select JDF Settings or click Actions > JDF Settings.

2 Select Fix the JDF conflict.

3 In the Media tab of the JDF Settings window, select a corresponding media entry from the Map to SubstrateCatalog menu or select Add/Map to Substrate Catalog, and click OK.

The parameters of the media specified for the JDF job are listed alongside the parameters of the Substrate Catalogmedia entry selected. You can now print the job.


Fiery JDF Jobs

78

Managing color

Color print options

Color print options control the color management applied to a print job.The color print options accessed from the Device Center > Color Setup > Color Management in CommandWorkStation show the default color print settings for the Fiery server. A default color print setting is applied if thecolor print setting has not otherwise been specified for the job. A user can override the default settings for a job bychanging them in Job Properties, unless the settings have been locked.For more information about default job settings, see Set defaults for all job properties on page 46.Calibration is determined by the output profile, not by a print option. The calibration setting displayed is the oneassociated with the selected output profile.For more information about printing with color print options, see Color Printing, which is part of the userdocumentation set.Various resources for helping you manage color workflows in Command WorkStation are available. You can findlinks to training videos and other materials for making the most of the color tools. See:

• Learning solutions at Learning@EFI

• Color settings best practices flowchart and video

View or edit default color settings

You can view or edit default settings for most color print options.All color print options are displayed in one window, with the basic settings at the top, followed by Color input andColor settings below. The Color settings are for the most advanced users.

1 Open Device Center in one of the following ways:

• Click the More icon (three vertical dots) next to the server name in the Servers pane.

• Double-click the server name in the Servers pane.

• Click Server > Device Center.

• Right-click the server name and select Device Center.

2 Under Workflows, click Job Presets or Virtual Printers, and then click Set Defaults.


Managing color

79

https://training.efi.com/default.aspx#/login

http://resources.efi.com/FieryColorFlowchart

http://resources.efi.com/FieryColorFlowchartVideo

3 In the Default settings window, set options individually and choose whether to lock the option or leave itunlocked.You can also choose to Lock All or Unlock All.

4 Click OK.

Various resources for helping you manage color workflows in Command WorkStation are available. You can findlinks to training videos and other materials for making the most of the color tools. See:

• Learning solutions at Learning@EFI

• Color settings best practices flowchart and video

Color mode settings

The Color mode settings specify the output color space (CMYK, for example). If you change the Color mode setting,color management options are reset to the server default settings.The whole job will be printed in grayscale, CMYK, or CMYK+ (if available).

Note: CMYK output refers to press output of at least four process colors. If your press or printer suppports RGBoutput, and not CMYK output, all references to CMYK in the Fiery Command WorkStation Help do not apply. Forinformation about a press or printer that suppports RGB output exclusively, see the product-specific documentation.The possible settings for CMYK or CMYK+ are:

• CMYK for a color document.

• Grayscale for a grayscale or black-and-white document.

• CMYK+ prints color output with CMYK colorants plus additional colorants where available, using all colorants asprocess colors. One to three additional colorants may be available for your Fiery server, if supported.

Note: CMYK+ is not available for all Fiery servers.

Output profile

The Output profile print option specifies the output profile used to process a job. Color data in a print job isconverted to the color space of the printer, which is described by the output profile.In addition, the calibration that is associated with the output profile is applied to the job before printing.The Fiery server includes one or more default output profiles, each created for a specific media type. You can alsoimport your own output profiles to the Fiery server.

Use job defined settings

Rather than select a specific output profile for your job, you can let the Fiery server determine the output profileautomatically. The color mode and media type used in the print job determine the profile, or if the job uses mediafrom Substrate Catalog, the output profile specified in Substrate Catalog is used. For more information on defaultoutput profiles, see Setting a default color output profile on page 81 and How does the Fiery server decide whichoutput profile to use? on page 81.


Managing color

80

https://training.efi.com/default.aspx#/login

http://resources.efi.com/FieryColorFlowchart

http://players.brightcove.net/1263232659001/default_default/index.html?videoId=5468387850001

Device link profiles

If a CMYK-to-CMYK or RGB-to-CMYK device link profile is available for the specified output profile and sourceprofile, Device link profile selected is displayed below the Output profile drop-down list box. When a device linkprofile has been selected, the specific device link profile name is displayed below the Source profile drop-down listbox. The other source settings in the area are disabled as they are not applicable in the device link profile workflow.In this case, the selected output profile is not used for color management, since the device link profile is used.

Setting a default color output profile

If you do not want to manually select an output profile for every job, you can specify an output profile as thedefault. You can also override the default setting for a specific job.Your preferred output profile must be specified according to the Use job defined settings rules.For jobs using Substrate Catalog:

• Do not modify the front and back color profile settings for your media/substrate.The specified profile will be used, unless the setting is Server’s default.

For jobs not using Substrate Catalog, or when Substrate Catalog specifies Server’s default:

• Go to Device Center > Resources > Profiles. Under Output Profiles, select your preferred output profile andassociate it with all the available media types.

Note: Not all Fiery servers support association of output profiles with media.

You can override the default for a specific job by going to Job Properties > Color > Output profile. Instead of Usejob defined settings, select a profile from the list. You can also set a specific output profile as the default byaccessing Set defaults from the Server menu in Command WorkStation.

Note: The default output profile displayed in the Color tab of the Default Settings window is that set by the Fieryserver. The note displayed there ("Use job defined settings" is always the default profile selection.) refers to theOutput profile menu in the Job Properties window.If a job is using Substrate Catalog, the default output profile will be that specified in the Substrate Catalog entryfor the front color profile and the back color profile. Server's default is the profile determined by the Fiery server.For more information, see How does the Fiery server decide which output profile to use? on page 81.

How does the Fiery server decide which output profile to use?

The Fiery server takes a number of factors into account when deciding which output profile to use for a job.These factors are dependent on the implementation of Substrate Catalog on the Fiery server, which determineshow the user will select the media for a job.Substrate Catalog is implemented on the Fiery server in one of three ways:

• Substrate Catalog must be used for media selection.

• Substrate Catalog is optional for media selection.

• Substrate Catalog is not available for media selection.

The Fiery server runs the following tests to determine which output profile to use.

1 Is the Output profile in Job Properties set to the automatic output profile selection?


Managing color

81

2 Is Substrate Catalog used?

3 Which output profile is set most closely to the settings for your job?

Is the Output profile in Job Properties set to the automatic output profile selection?For automatic profile selection, the Output profile print option in the Color tab of the Job Properties windowmust be set to Use job defined settings. The option is displayed as Use job defined settings because moresettings than the media alone are considered. For example, if Color mode is set for CMYK+, the Color modemight be used in addition to the media itself to determine the profile.If a specific output profile is selected, it will be used. Make a specific selection when you are not satisfied withthe automatic selection or when you want to experiment with other profiles.

Is Substrate Catalog used?

When a Substrate Catalog media is specified in Job Properties, check the Substrate Catalog output profileassociation. To see the front and back color profiles association, right-click the chosen media in SubstrateCatalog and select Edit > Color Settings. If a specific output profile is associated with the media/substrate, thatprofile will be used.If the output profile association is set to Server’s default, the third test will be used.

Which output profile is set most closely to the settings for your job?

Check the association between the available output profiles and the job settings. Go to Device Center >Resources > Profiles and expand the Output Profiles section.Print options are dependent on the connected server. For example, the Media type print option is often availablebut not always.Options in the Description column in Profile Manager (Device Center > Resources > Profiles) typically do notmatch one-for-one the large number of equivalent job settings.For instance, Job Properties may offer multiple coated options, while there might be only one output profilesetting associated with coated media type. In this case, the output profile associated with coated will be used forall coated media.To change which output profile will be used by default with a media type, double-click the output profile of yourchoice, then check the media type this profile is compatible with. A single output profile can be specified formany, or all of the available media settings.

Device link profiles

To be selected for a print job, a device link profile must reside on the Fiery server and be associated with a specificsource profile and output profile.When you select the source profile and output profile settings associated with a device link profile, the Fiery serverbypasses its normal color management and applies the device link conversion to the color data in the job. The sourceprofile and the output profile are not used.Profiles that do not reside on the Fiery server do not appear as settings. A device link profile that is not associatedwith a source profile setting and an output profile setting cannot be selected for a job. Therefore, even though thesource profile and output profile that are associated with a device link profile are not used to calculate colorconversions, they must reside on the Fiery server.


Managing color

82

Device link profiles are disabled when certain Color input settings have been specified. See the table below:

RGB-CMYK device link CMYK-CMYK device link

Use RGB embedded profiles Use CMYK embedded profiles

RGB rendering intent CMYK rendering intent

Print RGB gray using black only Print CMYK gray using black only

Black point compensation

RGB source, CMYK source, and Grayscale source

The RGB source, CMYK source, and Grayscale source print options allow you to define the color spaces of the RGB,CMYK, and grayscale data, respectively, in your document so that the appropriate color conversion occurs on theFiery server.Commonly used color spaces are available on the Fiery server. For others, you can import CMYK and RGB customprofiles to the Fiery server. Custom grayscale profiles cannot be imported.

RGB source

When you specify a profile for RGB source, the Fiery server overrides source color space definitions or profiles thatother color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded RGBprofile, the RGB source setting overrides it.When you specify an RGB source profile, the output from the Fiery server is consistent across platforms. The RGBsource options are as follows:

• EFIRGB - Specifies an EFI-defined color space recommended for users who have no detailed information abouttheir RGB data.

• sRGB (PC) - A Microsoft and Hewlett-Packard recommended color space designed for typical home and officeapplications.

• Apple Standard - Specifies the color space of an older Mac OS computer monitor.

• Adobe RGB (1998) - An Adobe-defined color space, used in some prepress workflows as the default workingspace for Adobe Photoshop.

• eciRGB v2 - The European Color Initiative (ECI) recommended color space for use as an RGB working colorspace and color data exchange format for ad agencies, publishers, reproduction, and printing houses.

• Fiery RGB v5 - An EFI-defined color space recommended for users of office applications. This color space issimilar to EFIRGB but is larger and can provide a more desirable blue output.

In cases where you do not want RGB source to override another specified source color space, select the Use RGBembedded profiles option.If the Use RGB embedded profiles option is enabled, the Fiery server honors objects in the document with RGBprofiles, and objects without profiles are color managed with the RGB source profile from Job Properties.

CMYK source

The CMYK source option can be set to any CMYK source profile that is present on the Fiery server.


Managing color

83

To properly manage color in a printed image that was separated using an ICC profile, the same profile must bespecified for printing the image.The CMYK source profile setting you specify depends on the CMYK profile or press standard for which the CMYKdata was separated. This option affects CMYK data only.

• For images that were separated using a custom separation (such as a separation produced with an ICC profile),select the profile used for RGB to CMYK conversions in the prepress workflow on the Fiery server with theCMYK source setting.

• For images that were separated for a press standard, select the press standard as the CMYK source setting.

If the job contains an embedded CMYK profile, select the Use CMYK embedded profiles option. The embeddedprofile is applied to CMYK data.The CMYK source option can be set to any CMYK source profile that is present on the Fiery server.If you do not want CMYK data in a job to be converted to the output color space, you can select one of the followingsettings:

• Bypass conversion - This setting sends the original CMYK data in the job to the printer without conversion, butwith calibration applied.

• ColorWise OFF - This setting sends the original CMYK data in the job to the printer without calibration appliedand without converting the CMYK data. The CMYK data is still subject to the total ink or toner limit, however.The ColorWise OFF setting is available for a specific job but it cannot be the default setting on the Fiery server.You select this setting for a specific job.

Note: When you print with the ColorWise OFF setting, make sure that the options you choose in your applicationdo not cause the application to modify CMYK data. You must specify no color management in the applicationwhen you print with the ColorWise OFF setting.

Grayscale source

The Fiery server supports separate processing of jobs with Device Gray and ICC Based Grayscale through their owncolor conversion.The Grayscale source profile setting provides factory-installed grayscale profiles to use for source-to-output profilecolor conversion. Users cannot import their own grayscale ICC profiles.If the job contains an embedded profile associated with grayscale objects in the document, select the Use Grayembedded profiles option.The Grayscale source option can be set to any of the factory-installed grayscale source profiles that are present onthe Fiery server.

Use RGB/CMYK/Gray embedded profiles

You can specify whether the Fiery server uses the source profile (either RGB or CMYK or grayscale) that isembedded in the print job rather than the source profile specified in the print settings.

RGB

If you turn on Use RGB embedded profiles, the Fiery server honors the embedded RGB profile information forobjects tagged with an RGB profile and uses the RGB source profile for RGB objects without an RGB profile. If youturn off this option, the Fiery server uses the profile specified in the RGB source option.


Managing color

84

CMYK

If you turn on Use CMYK embedded profiles, the Fiery server honors the embedded CMYK profile information forobjects tagged with a CMYK profile and uses the CMYK source profile for CMYK objects without a CMYK profile. Ifyou turn off this option, the Fiery server uses the profile specified in the CMYK source option.

Gray

If you turn on Use Gray embedded profiles, the Fiery server honors the embedded gray profile information forobjects tagged with a gray profile and uses the source gray profile for gray objects without a gray profile.

Black point compensation

The Black point compensation option lets you control the output quality of shadow areas for CMYK source colors.Black point compensation works by scaling the source colors so that the darkest point in the source profile maps tothe darkest point in the output profile. Use Black point compensation to enhance details in shadows when theCMYK source space is larger than the gamut of the printer. In proofing applications, when the CMYK source spaceis smaller than the gamut of the printer, do not use this option.

Note: For RGB source colors, black point compensation is always applied to Relative Colorimetric. Black pointcompensation does not apply to Absolute Colorimetric. Photographic already scales the saturated colors and shadowdetail to the color capabilities of the output device, so black point compensation is not relevant.

CMYK rendering intent

The CMYK rendering intent option specifies how CMYK input data is converted to the available color gamut of theoutput color space. This conversion can be optimized for the type of color image being printed.The Fiery server also provides support for a fifth rendering intent, Pure Primaries.

Note: If you experience tone reproduction problems, use the Photographic setting.

Rendering intent Best used for Equivalent ICC rendering intent

Photographic - Typicallyresults in less-saturated outputthan presentation renderingwhen printing out-of-gamutcolors. This style preservestonal relationships in images,and scales the grayscale tonalrange in the source to theavailable tonal range in theoutput device.

Photographs, including scans and imagesfrom stock photography DVDs or CDs anddigital camera images.

Image, Contrast, and Perceptual


Managing color

85


Presentation - Createssaturated colors but does notmatch printed colors preciselyto displayed colors. In-gamutcolors, such as flesh tones, arerendered well. This style issimilar to Photographicrendering intent, and can beused to increase contrast forgrayscale content.

Artwork and graphs in presentations. Thisstyle can be used for mixed pages thatcontain presentation graphics andphotographs.

Saturation, Graphics

Relative Colorimetric - Provideswhite point transformationbetween the source anddestination white points. Forexample, the bluish-white color(gray) of a monitor is replacedby paper white. This styleavoids visible borders betweenblank spaces and white objects.Relative Colorimetric is thedefault rendering intent forgrayscale and is best suited forpreserving the appearance ofgray.

Advanced use when color matching isimportant, but you prefer white colors in thedocument to print as paper white. This stylemay also be used with PostScript colormanagement to affect CMYK data forsimulation purposes.

Relative Colorimetric

Absolute Colorimetric -Provides no white pointtransformation between thesource and destination whitepoints. For example, the bluish-white color (gray) is notreplaced by paper white. Thisstyle can introduce gamutclipping in high light andshadow details.

Situations when exact colors are needed andvisible borders are not distracting. This stylemay also be used with PostScript colormanagement to affect CMYK data forsimulation purposes.

Setting CMYK rendering intent to AbsoluteColorimetric simulates the white of thepaper using CMYK values rather thanleaving the paper white areas of the pageunprinted. This has the same effect as theformer Paper Simulation feature.

Absolute Colorimetric

Pure Primaries - Uses purecolorants, free fromcontaminating colorants thatare introduced when colormanagement tries to match theappearance of a color on imagesystems with different colorcapabilities.

When source content is made up of one ortwo process colorants, they remain as one ortwo process colorants in the final print. Thisrendering intent does not achievecolorimetric accuracy, and content is notexpected to match that of other printsystems.

Pure Primaries


Managing color

86

Grayscale rendering intent

The Grayscale rendering intent option specifies how grayscale input data is converted to the available color gamut ofthe output color space. This conversion can be optimized for the type of gray objects being printed.To control the appearance of text, graphics, and images in grayscale, select the appropriate rendering intent. TheFiery server allows you to select from the four rendering intents currently found in industry-standard ICC profiles.



Photographic - Preservesrelationships between variouscolors in an image whenperforming gamut compression.

High-gamut photographic images,especially when converting to a smallgamut printer space. Typically notrequired for grayscale images.

Perceptual

Presentation - Increases colorsaturation when performing gamutcompression.

Vector artwork and graphics forpresentations. Generally not used forgrayscale source rendering.

Saturation

Relative Colorimetric - Preservesin-gamut colors and remaps out-of-color gamut colors only whenperforming out-of-gamutcompression. Maps source whitepoint to desination white point (no"paper simulation").

Precise color matching of vector artworkand logos. Best choice for grayscalesource rendering.


Absolute Colorimetric - Preservesin-gamut colors and remaps out-of-color gamut colors only whenperforming out-of-gamutcompression. It does not map thesource white point to destinationwhite point ("paper simulation").

Proofing jobs. Generally not used forgrayscale source rendering.


RGB rendering intent

The RGB rendering intent option specifies how RGB input data is converted to the available color gamut of theoutput color space. This conversion can be optimized for the type of color image being printed.To control the appearance of images in artwork, or RGB photographs from Adobe Photoshop, select the appropriaterendering intent. The Fiery server allows you to select from the four rendering intents currently found in industry-standard ICC profiles.


Managing color

87



Photographic - Typicallyresults in less-saturated outputthan presentation renderingwhen printing out-of-gamutcolors. This style preservestonal relationships in images.

Photographs, including scans and imagesfrom stock photography CDs and digitalcamera images.

Image, Contrast, and Perceptual

Presentation - Createssaturated colors but does notmatch printed colors preciselyto displayed colors. In-gamutcolors, such as flesh tones, arerendered well. This style issimilar to the Photographicrendering intent.

Artwork and graphs in presentations. Thisstyle can be used for mixed pages thatcontain presentation graphics andphotographs.

Saturation, Graphics

Relative Colorimetric - Provideswhite point transformationbetween the source anddestination white points. Forexample, the bluish-white color(gray) of a monitor is replacedby paper white. This styleavoids visible borders betweenblank spaces and white objects.

When color matching is important, but youprefer white colors in the document to printas paper white. This style may also be usedwith PostScript color management to affectCMYK or RGB data for simulationpurposes.


Absolute Colorimetric -Provides no white pointtransformation between thesource and destination whitepoints. For example, the bluish-white color (gray) is notreplaced by paper white.

Situations when exact colors are needed andvisible borders are not distracting. This stylemay also be used with PostScript colormanagement to affect CMYK or RGB datafor simulation purposes.


Print RGB/CMYK gray using black only

When the Print RGB gray using black only option is turned on, any RGB color that has equal R, G, and B values isprinted as K-only black instead of CMYK black. Similarly, when Print CMYK gray using black only is turned on, anyCMYK color, where C, M, and Y are 0 (zero), and K is any value, is printed as K-only black instead of CMYK black.You can turn on Print RGB gray using black only or Print CMYK gray using black only for either Text/Graphics orText/Graphics/Images. "Graphics" refers to vector graphics. "Images" refers to bitmap images.

Note: You can also turn on Print gray using black only for the Grayscale source profile, with the same options ofText/Graphics and Text/Graphics/Images.


Managing color

88

The following limitations apply:

• The Print RGB gray using black only and Print CMYK gray using black only options have no effect on a job that issent as separations.

• If CMYK rendering intent is set to Pure Primaries, Print CMYK gray using black only does not affect the output.

• If Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source is turned on, Print RGB gray using black only is turned off. Likewise, if PrintRGB gray using black only is turned on, you cannot turn on Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source.

• If Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On or Rich Black On, it takes precedence over Print RGB gray usingblack only and Print CMYK gray using black only for 100% black text and graphics.

• If a gray is specified as a spot color, Print RGB gray using black only and Print CMYK gray using black only do notaffect that gray.

Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source

The Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source option determines how RGB colors (as well as Lab and XYZ colors) areconverted to CMYK. This option defines the color spaces that are used by the Fiery server to separate the RGB datainto CMYK values.

• When Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source is turned on, all RGB colors are first converted to the CMYK colorspace defined by the CMYK source print option before being converted to the CMYK color space of the printer(as defined by the Output profile print option). The result is a simulation of the RGB colors that would be outputfrom a printer with the characteristics defined by the CMYK source profile.With Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source, for example, if a high-quality ICC profile is available for anotherprinter, your printer can simulate the behavior of that other printer.

• When Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK source is turned off, all RGB colors are converted directly to the CMYK colorspace of the press (as defined by the Output profile print option).

Spot color matching

The Spot color matching option provides automatic matching of spot colors in a job with their best CMYKequivalents.

• When Spot color matching is turned on, the Fiery server uses a built-in table to generate the closest CMYKmatches of spot colors that the printer can produce. (New tables are generated automatically for each outputprofile that you add to the Fiery server.)With Fiery Spot-On, the Fiery server uses the CMYK matches determined through Command WorkStation SpotColors.

• The Use spot group menu allows you to select a spot color group that Fiery server searches first for spot colordefinitions during file processing. When new spot color groups have been created in Device Center > Resources >Spot Colors, the new groups are listed in the Use spot group menu. If a spot color is not found in the selected list,the Fiery server searches all other spot color groups for a matching spot color name. If the name is not found, thespot color is rendered with the alternate color in the document.

• When Spot color matching is turned off, the Fiery server processes the spot color using the alternate color spacedefinition and this can be CMYK, RGB, grayscale, or Lab. In this workflow, the spot color definitions in the spotcolor library on the Fiery server are ignored.


Managing color

89

Note: A spot color that is not included in the built-in table is simulated using the alternate color that is provided inthe document.For jobs that include spot colors, turn Spot color matching on unless you are printing proofs of process color presssimulations. In that case, turn Spot color matching off and select the appropriate CMYK, RGB, or grayscale sourcesetting.

Black text and graphics

The Black text and graphics option affects black text and vector graphics. When you set this option to Pure Black On,the black generated by applications (RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) is printed using black only.With Black text and graphics set to Pure Black On, black text and line art are not misregistered, since only onecolorant is used. This setting also eliminates blasting, which is an undesirable effect that occurs when excessamounts of ink or toner, combined with certain types of paper stock, cause objects to spread beyond their definedboundaries.For some jobs, we recommend setting Black text and graphics to Normal. For example, if a job includes gradient fillsthat use black, the Normal setting gives the best result.If you set Black overprint (for pure black) to Text or Text/Graphics, Black text and graphics must be set to Pure BlackOn.

Note: Use Black text and graphics only when printing composites, not separations.The following table describes the behavior of Black text and graphics with black defined in different color spaces.

Color Black text and graphics = Normal Black text and graphics = Pure Black Onor Rich Black On

RGB=0,0,0 (all other RGBvalues are unaffected by Blacktext and graphics)

Printed according to the definition forRGB=0,0,0 in the output profile. This maybe a rich black (one that uses multiplecolorants) if the output profile specifies arich black, or K-only if the output profilespecifies K-only for RGB=0,0,0. The outputis affected by calibration.

Printed as 100% K (Pure Black On) or 100%K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) usingblack and cyan.


Managing color

90

Color Black text and graphics = Normal Black text and graphics = Pure Black Onor Rich Black On

CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% (allother CMYK values areunaffected by Black text andgraphics)

Printed as K-only or as a rich black using allcolorants, depending on the CMYK sourceand CMYK rendering intent settings.

If CMYK rendering intent is set to PurePrimaries, CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as100% K and the amount of black is limitedby the CMYK source profile and calibration.

If CMYK source is set to Bypass conversion,CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as 100% Kand the amount of black is limited by theCMYK source profile and calibration.

If CMYK rendering intent is set to RelativeColorimetric, CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% isprinted as a rich black using all colorantsaccording to the output profile. The outputis affected by calibration.

Note: Setting CMYK source to ColorWiseOFF disables the CMYK Source profile andcalibration. In this case, the black is notlimited by calibration.

Printed as 100% K (Pure Black On) or 100%K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) usingblack and cyan, regardless of the CMYKsource and CMYK rendering intent settings.

Spot colors (unaffected by Blacktext and graphics)

Standard spot color processing Standard spot color processing

Note: PostScript applications may convert elements defined as RGB=0, 0, 0 to four-color CMYK black beforesending the job to the Fiery server. These elements are not affected by the Black text and graphics option.

Black overprint (for pure black)

The Black overprint (for pure black) option specifies whether black text, or black text and vector graphics (whereblack is defined as RGB=0, 0, 0, or as CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) print over colored backgrounds. If you turn off thisoption, black text, or black text and graphics knock out colored backgrounds. Knocking out can create a white edgearound objects, or a white space, caused by the misalignment of color plates.

Note: You can set Black overprint (for pure black) only if Black text and graphics is set to Pure Black On.The Black overprint (for pure black) option has the following settings:

• Text - Black text overprints colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing the halo effect frommisregistration of colors.

• Text/Graphics - Black text and graphics overprint colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and the haloeffect from misregistration of colors.

• Off - Black text and graphics knock out colored backgrounds.

Note: PostScript applications may perform their own black overprint conversions before printing.


Managing color

91

An example of how you might use this setting is a page that contains black text on a light blue background. Thebackground blue is CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. The black text is CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%.

• With Black overprint (for pure black) set to Text or Text/Graphics, the final text or graphic portions of the pageare overprinted, or combined with the underlying color. Black colors generated by applications (for example,RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using black only. This means that black text and line art donot exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly). No transition in cyan and magentaoccurs and the quality of the output is improved, because it does not show artifacts near the edges of text.

• With Black overprint (for pure black) set to Off, the border of the text or graphic is on an edge that has cyan andmagenta on one side (outside the object) and black on the other side (inside the object). This transition maycause visible artifacts due to the practical limitations of the printer.

Note: The reproduction of CMYK components is affected by the CMYK source setting and calibration when CMYKis not 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%.

Profiles

Profile Manager in Command WorkStation allows you to manage the ICC profiles that reside on the Fiery server.Color Editor (in Profile Manager) allows you to create a custom profile from an existing CMYK profile and use theAutoGray feature to adjust the gray balance of output profiles.The Fiery server uses the following types of profiles for color management:

• An RGB source profile defines the source color space for RGB (and Lab) colors in a print job. Typical devicesusing RGB profiles are monitors, scanners, and digital cameras. An RGB source profile enables the Fiery server toconvert RGB colors in a print job to the CMYK color space of the printer accurately.

• A CMYK source profile defines the source color space for CMYK colors in a print job. Typical devices usingCMYK profiles are printing presses and digital printers. A CMYK source profile enables the Fiery server toconvert CMYK colors in a print job to the CMYK color space of the printer accurately.

• A grayscale source profile defines the source color space for grayscale colors in a print job. Typical devices usinggrayscale profiles are printing pressses and digital printers. A grayscale source profile enables the Fiery server toconvert grayscale colors in a print job to the grayscale color space of the printer accurately.

• An output profile describes the color characteristics of the printer when printing to a specific media type. Anoutput profile is associated with a calibration that describes the expected color output densities of the printer.The output profile and its associated calibration are applied to all color data in a print job.

• A device link profile describes the conversion from a specific source color space to an output color space. Withdevice link profiles, the complete conversion from the source device to the destination device is defined, and theFiery server does not calculate the conversion.The Fiery server supports two kinds of device link profiles: RGB source to CMYK destination and CMYK sourceto CMYK destination.A device link profile must be associated with a source profile setting (CMYK Device Link for a CMYK-to-CMYKdevice link profile or RGB/Lab Device Link for an RGB-to-CMYK device link profile) and an Output Profilesetting, otherwise the device link profile cannot be selected for a job.


Managing color

92

View profile properties

Profile Manager in Command WorkStation displays information (such as device or paper type) for the profiles onthe Fiery server.A check mark to the left of a profile name indicates that the profile is the default profile. For example, a check marknext to the sRGB (PC) profile under RGB Source Profiles means that sRGB (PC) is the default setting for the RGBSource option. You can change the default profile in the Color Management window.A lock icon to the left of the profile name indicates that the profile is factory-installed and cannot be deleted oredited.

1 In Device Center, click Profiles under Resources.

2 In Profile Manager, click the profile to select it. The properties of the selected profile are shown on the right sideof the window.

Compare profile gamuts

If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can use Fiery Profile Inspector to compare the gamutsof two profiles. Profile Inspector displays the gamuts in three-dimensional models, allowing you to see the colors thatdo and do not overlap between the two gamuts. For example, one profile might have a wider range in the blue hues.1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab, click Profiles and select a profile.

2 While pressing the Ctrl key, select the second profile (both profiles are selected).

3 Right-click either profile and select Compare Profiles.

Profile Inspector opens in a separate window. For more information, click the Help icon in Profile Inspector.

Import or export profiles

Profile Manager in Command WorkStation allows you to import profiles to the Fiery server to make the profilesavailable for printing jobs on the Fiery server. Use the export function to back up profiles, so that no custom profilesare lost, for example, when the Fiery server software is updated.You can also export a profile to your computer to use it with an ICC-aware application, such as Adobe Photoshop.

Import profiles

You can import a source profile (RGB or CMYK), an output profile, or a device link profile to the Fiery server. Youcannot import a grayscale profile.

Note: On Windows, a profile must have a file name extension of .icc or .icm to be selectable for importing. On MacOS, a profile must have a file type of “profile.”

1 In Device Center, click Profiles under Resources tab, and then click Import.

2 Select a folder in the Location list.


Managing color

93

3 Browse to the location of the profile to import.

4 Select the profile, and click Open.

5 If the Profile Settings dialog box is displayed, select settings for this profile and click OK.You set the profile settings when the imported profile is a new profile (not a replacement of a profile already onthe Fiery server).

Export profiles

You can export a profile from the Fiery server as a backup measure or to use the profile with an ICC-awareapplication such as Adobe Photoshop.1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab, and then click Profiles.

2 Select the profile and click Export.

3 Browse to the desired location on your computer and click Select Folder to save the profile.

Create or delete profiles

Profile Manager in Command WorkStation allows you to create new output profiles and device link profiles anddelete profiles that are no longer needed.You must have Fiery Color Profiler Suite installed on your computer to create new profiles.

Create output profiles

If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can use Fiery Printer Profiler to create an outputprofile.

Note: You can also create an output profile by editing an existing output profile in Color Editor and saving it as anew profile.You can start Fiery Printer Profiler from Profile Manager in Command WorkStation.

1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab, and then click Profiles.

2 Click New and select Output Profile.

Printer Profiler opens in a separate window. For more information about using Printer Profiler to create an outputprofile, see the online Help for Printer Profiler.

Note: You can also start Fiery Printer Profiler from Command WorkStation Calibrator, after you create a newcalibration setting.


Managing color

94

Create device link profiles

If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can use Fiery Device Linker to create a device linkprofile.You can start Fiery Device Linker from Profile Manager in Command WorkStation.

1 In Device Center, click Profiles under Resources.

2 Click New and select Device Link.

Device Linker opens in a separate window. For more information about using Device Linker to create a device linkprofile, see the online Help for Device Linker.

Delete profiles

You can delete profiles that are no longer needed. Deleting profiles also helps to free up disk space on the Fieryserver. You cannot delete locked profiles.1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab, click Profiles, and select the profile.

2 Click Settings, set Label in Driver to Unassigned, and then click OK.

Note: Label in Driver is not available for models of Fiery server. If this option does not appear, skip this step.

3 Click Delete, and then click Yes to confirm.

Edit profile settings

Profile settings are attributes that determine how the Fiery server uses the profile. For example, you can assign adescription or media type to a profile. Profile settings do not affect the content of the profile.1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab, and then click Profiles.

2 Select a profile and click Settings.

3 In the Profile Settings window, set the options as needed and click OK. The selections that are available depend onthe type of profile and the model of Fiery server.

• Profile Description - A description that identifies the profile. The description cannot be changed if the profile islocked.

• Media Type - One or more media settings that an output profile is associated with. These settings are usedwhen the output profile for a job is determined by its media settings (rather than set to a specific outputprofile).If Media Type is not shown, use Substrate Catalog to configure media-defined profiles.

• Calibration - The calibration to associate with an output profile.


Managing color

95

• CMYK Source Profile or RGB Source Profile - The source profile setting associated with a device link profile. Adevice link profile is selected for a job by a specific combination of source profile and output profile settings. ACMYK-to-CMYK device link profile has a CMYK Source Profile setting. An RGB-to-CMYK device link profilehas an RGB Source Profile setting.

Note: Edits made to a CMYK source profile do not apply when a device link profile associated with the CMYKsource profile is used.

• Output Profile - The output profile setting associated with a device link profile.

Edit profile content

Command WorkStation provides Color Editor for editing CMYK profiles.In Color Editor, you can edit a CMYK profile (CMYK source or output profile). Use Color Editor to fine-tune thedensity curves of a profile.If you have the Fiery Color Profiler Suite option installed on your computer, you can edit profiles in Fiery ProfileEditor, accessed from Command WorkStation. You can edit the color data that define the gamut of an outputprofile.

Edit profiles in Color Editor

With Color Editor, you can adjust features such as CMYK density curves and target densities.Edits made with Color Editor are for printing with the Fiery server only. They do not affect the profile if the profile isused in another context.


2 Select a profile and click Edit.

3 Select Color Editor.

Note: If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is not installed on your computer, you can skip this step. Color Editor will openautomatically.

4 In Color Editor, adjust the density curves. For fine adjustments, work with only one or two colors at a time.The curves on the graph map the input percentage to the output percentage for each of the four color channels(C, M, Y, and K). The percentages refer to the size of the CMYK halftone dots.

• To show or hide the C, M, Y, or K curves, click the "eye" icon for each color.

• To bring a curve to the front, click its color bar, next to the "eye" icon.

• To adjust the brightness of the curves that are shown, use the plus and minus buttons.

• To adjust a curve, drag a point on the curve, click a point and type new numbers in the Input and Outputfields, or click a point and use the arrow keys to move it.

Note: Adjust the curves after you adjust the brightness.


Managing color

96

5 For output profiles: Optionally, if your Fiery server stores the calibration target in the output profile, you can editthe maximum densities of the calibration target (the D-Max values) for each color (C, M, Y, and K).If the D-Max values are not shown, then your Fiery server stores the calibration target separately from the outputprofile. In this case, you can view and adjust the D-Max values in Calibrator.

WARNING Even if you can edit the maximum density values, we recommend that you only view them. Acalibration target represents the ideal values for calibration, and the output profile contains thesevalues. The calibration target should not be changed unnecessarily.

6 Optionally, print a test page.

7 When you are finished, click Save and enter a description for the new profile.

CAUTION If you do not enter a new description, the edited profile overwrites the original. If you edit and save alocked profile, you can only save it as a copy. A locked profile cannot be overwritten.

Edit profiles in Fiery Profile Editor

If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can use Fiery Profile Editor to edit an output profile.With Profile Editor, you can adjust global color features such as rendering intent and CMYK density curves, as wellas adjust specific hues, colors, or even a specific data point in the profile gamut.1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab and then click Profiles.

2 Select an output profile, click Edit, and then select Fiery Profile Editor.

For more information about using Fiery Profile Editor to edit a profile, click the Help icon in Profile Editor.

Print a test page

After editing a profile in Color Editor, you can print a test page that shows images with and without your edits.The test page is either your own sample image or the comparison page provided by the Fiery server.

Print the comparison page

You can print the comparison page provided by the Fiery server. The comparison page shows a variety of images andcolor patches printed with and without the profile edits.1 In Device Center, click the Resources tab, and then click Profiles.

2 Select a profile and click Edit. If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, select Color Editor.

3 In Color Editor, click Test Print.

4 Select Comparison page, select the desired settings for Paper Size and Input tray, and click Print.


Managing color

97

Print a sample image

You can create a sample image to print as a test page. The sample image is a user-defined CALIB.PS file in the Holdqueue.1 In a graphics application, create a file to be used as the sample image.

2 Save the sample image as a PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file called CALIB.PS.

3 In Command WorkStation, import the file to the Hold queue of the Fiery server.

4 In Job Center, double-click the CALIB.PS job and set the job properties for printing the page.


6 Select a profile and click Edit. If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, select Color Editor.

7 In Color Editor, click Test Print.

8 Select Sample image page and click Print.

Spot colors in Spot Pro

Spot Pro is a comprehensive program for creating, managing, and editing spot colors. Spot Pro allows you to editspot color definitions on the Fiery server and create custom spot color definitions. Spot colors are a part of the SpotPro feature. If Spot Pro is available for your Fiery server and is enabled, you can adjust and manage lists of spot colorsand their CMYK equivalents.Command WorkStation has an internal spot color library which automatically manages the spot colors of all majorspot color manufacturers. If you load a job that contains a spot color that is not known to Command WorkStation,you must define it before you can print the job correctly.Spot Pro pre-loads the Fiery server libraries of named colors such as those from PANTONE, HKS, TOYO, and DIC.The spot color libraries store the original colors with their device-independent definitions (L*a*b* values). For eachoutput profile on the Fiery server, Spot Pro computes the best available CMYK reproduction of each spot color. Eachtime a new profile is generated or updated, Spot Pro automatically recalculates the best CMYK equivalents andconverted L*a*b* values.You can create a list of “substitute” colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB orCMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot Pro color definition.This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors.

Start Spot Pro

You can start Spot Pro from Device Center in Command WorkStation.You can add spot colors to a new or existing custom color group. You cannot add new spot colors to a system group.

1 Start Spot Pro in one of the following ways:

• In Job Center, click Spot Pro from the toolbar.

• Click Server > Spot Pro.


Managing color

98


• In Device Center, click Resources > Spot Pro.

2 Click Launch Spot Pro.


• To create a new spot color, from the toolbar, click New > Spot Color.Spot Pro retrieves information from the connected printer and uses it to check whether new spot colors can beaccurately reproduced.

• To open an existing spot color group, click Open in the toolbar, and browse to a spot color group. Spot Pro canimport spot colors from the following file formats: Adobe Swatch Exchange (.ASE), CXF, ICC, and ICM.

The Spot Pro workspace

The main window displays a list of spot color groups and a list of named spot colors within each group. When anamed spot color is selected, a preview of the spot color is shown.The Spot Pro main window includes the following areas:

• Spot Pro group paneThe order of the spot color groups defines the search order for the spot color on the Fiery server.Spot Pro color groups cannot be auto-sorted by name, type, or lock-status.The latest group is added on the top (or listed first) of the list.By default, the Fiery server searches for a color from the top of the list and will apply the first matching namedspot color definition to the job. You may override this search setting on a job-by-job basis, by selecting a differentgroup in the Job Properties window.Each spot group can be moved up or down manually on the list to change the color search sequence.You may right-click the group name and select Move up or Move down to move one step at a time or selectMove top or Move bottom to move the group name to the top or bottom of the list which changes the searchorder.

• Spot Pro colors paneThe column width can be adjusted.The newest color will be added to the top (or listed first) of the list.You may right-click the spot color name and select Move up or Move down to move one step at a time or selectMove top or Move bottom to move the spot color to the top or bottom of the list which changes the searchorder.


Managing color

99

• Spot Pro color preview paneFor the selected spot color, a preview is shown for the original and converted spot color.The gamut warning and ∆E are also shown for the selected spot color.The orignal and converted L*a*b* values, computed based on the selected output profile.The separation values for the selected spot color are displayed.

To edit a spot color, click the Edit icon ( ) to open the Spot Pro Editor window.

Select one or multiple spot colors and click the Duplicate icon ( ) to open the Spot Pro Duplicate window. Theduplicated spot colors can be saved to an entirely new group where you can specify a new group name or appendthem to an existing custom group.

• Spot Pro color editor paneYou can edit the selected spot color. The spot color can be edited by modifying the L*a*b* values, LCH values,device separation based on the selected output profile, and variations.

Spot Pro group types

Spot Pro has two color group types, system colors and custom colors, and substitute color groups.Spot color groups - system colorsSystem spot color groups and all colors in the groups are locked and can be edited, but they cannot be deleted orrenamed. In order to edit the name of the spot color, duplicate the color(s) and save into a custom spot color group.Spot color groups - custom colorsYou can create at least one custom spot color group or as many as needed.All spot colors in the custom group can be edited, copied, cut, deleted, etc. The colors in the same custom spot groupmust have an unique name; however, colors in different custom spot color group may have the same name.Substitute color groupsSubstitute color groups can be created for custom substitute colors.

Spot Pro color types

The user defined output profile is used to display color separation values and color swatches.Spot Pro generates all separation values automatically when a color is created or duplicated. You may select adifferent output profile to see its respective separation values, and/or choose to change the separation values of oneor more output profiles. You can also apply the color separation of one output profile to multiple or all outputprofiles.


Managing color

100

Apply separation values of one output profile to other output profiles

Keep in mind the following:

• If separation values are applied to other output profiles, it may result in an inaccurate colorimetric spot colorreproduction.

• If separation values are applied to dissimilar color space or dissimilar media or substrate, it may result in aninaccurate or undesired result.

1 In the Spot Pro, do one of the following:

• Right-click a group and select Apply to.

• Right-click a color or shift-click multiple colors, and select Apply to.

• Click the Apply to icon next to the output profile field.

2 Choose the output profile(s) to apply the separation values.

3 Click Save.

Customizing Spot Pro

Spot Pro Preferences

You can set preferences for Spot Pro.1 To open the Spot Pro Preferences window, click the Preferences toolbar icon.

2 Specify the ∆E tolerance.

3 Specify ∆E format.

• dE 2000 - A variant of CIELAB that CIE recommended in 2000. This method uses KL = KC = KH = 1.0.

• dE CIE76 – A distance based formula for color difference, defined by CIE (International Commission onIllumination) in 1976.

• dE CMC - The ratio of differences in lightness to chroma and to hue calculated using the ISO standard ISO 105-J03. Values for lightness and chroma weights are 1.0 for use with perceptibility data.

• dE 94 - A variant of CIELAB that CIE TC1-29 recommends as the color difference formula. For graphic artsapplications, this method uses K1 = 0.045 and K2 = 0.015.

Manage Spot Pro columns

You can customize column headings for the system spot color or custom spot color. Change the order of thesecolumns or add/delete them to present information relevant to the spot colors in a group.


Managing color

101

Change the column display

You can add columns or remove them.1 Right-click any column in the Spot Pro colors pane.

2 The column selections are as follows:

• For a system spot color, select Show color swatch, Lab original, Lab converted, Separation, or ∆E.

• For a custom spot color, select Show color swatch, Lab saved, Lab converted, Separation, or ∆E.

Note: When the ∆E column is added, a warning icon shows when a ∆E value exceeds the tolerance set in the SpotPro Preferences window.

Note: The Patch & Name column cannot be removed or moved.

3 Select an item from the menu to add to or remove from the columns.

Adjust the width of a column

You can change the width of a Spot Pro column.• Drag a column border to the left or right.

Change the order of the columns

You can change the width of a Spot Pro column• Right-click a column, drag it to change the position of the column in the Spot Pro colors pane.

Note: The Patch & Name column cannot be removed or moved.

Spot Pro toolbar icons

The Spot Pro toolbar displays a standard set of icons.

New Shows a sub-menu with the available selections depending on the currentlyselected group.

Note: The Spot group option is available for a system spot group, customcolor group, and substitute color group.

Spot color Creates a new spot color in the currently selected spot color group.

Note: The Spot color option is available for a system spot group, specialtycolor group, and custom color group.

Substitute group Creates a group for substitute spot colors.


Managing color

102

Note: The Substitute group option is available for a system spot group,specialty color group, custom color group, and substitute color group.

Substitute color Creates a new substitute color in the currently selected substitute colorgroup.

Note: The Substitute color option is available only for a substitute colorgroup.

Delete Deletes the selected color group or named spot colors from the color group.

Print/Ready to Print/Send to Printqueue

Depending on the Fiery server, for the selected spot colors or the selectedspot color group, you can initiate Print, Ready to Print or Send to Printqueue.

Optimize Optimizes the selected colors or all colors in a selected group for a selectedmedia or substrate and output profile.

Open Opens a spot color or spot color group from a user-specified location. It alsoallows opening custom or user-created libraries to and from Adobeapplications.

Save As Saves a spot color or spot color group from the Fiery server to another user-specified location. It also allows saving custom or user-created libraries toand from Adobe applications.

Preference Opens the Spot Pro Preferences window where you can set the ∆E toleranceand ∆E format.

Search for a spot color

You can easily search for and locate a spot color and the show the various libraries where the spot color is present.You can use the Search color field to find a named spot color or a list of spot colors based on the search criteria. Thespot color results are shown under the group names with small swatches next to spot color names.

Search for spot colors

You can search for custom spot colors and spot colors from the internal spot color library.1 Type your search criteria in the Search color field located next to the Spot Pro toolbar icons.

You can search for parts of a named spot color. For example, if you search for “red”, Spot Pro will find all spotcolors with “red” anywhere in their name.


Managing color

103

2 Press Enter or click the magnifying glass icon (Search icon) to locate the spot colors that meet the specified searchcriteria. The typed text is not case-sensitive.If the search criteria is less than three characters, the search results are limited to the currently selected group.You may search in all the groups by clicking the Search all Spot Color Libraries link. If the search criteria is threeor more characters, the search is executed throughout all the spot color groups. The results are displayed in pageslimiting to 500 results at a time.

3 A spot color can be selected from the search results. The search term remains in the Search color field with an ‘X’icon.If you click the Search color field area again, the search result will show again. You can choose to narrow thesearch or select another result from the list.

4 After you have executed a search, you can clear the current search criteria by clicking the ‘X’ icon to clear thesearch field and the search results, or the search result will be cleared automatically when you choose anothermajor action such as a toolbar action, edit a spot color, or close the Spot Pro window. This allows you to search bydifferent criteria.

Edit a spot color

You can define the L*a*b* values, the CMYK values of a spot color by typing the numerical values, by selecting avisual match from a pattern of color swatches, or by measuring the color of a physical object using a measurementdevice.The Spot color matching print option automatically matches spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents or L*a*b*values so that spot colors can be simulated using the CMYK colorants. However, you may want to adjust the defaultCMYK equivalents or L*a*b* values to achieve a better match for your specific printing conditions. You can modifyspot color definitions using Spot Pro.Both system and custom spot colors may be edited. The system spot color names may not be renamed or deleted.

1 Start Spot Pro in one of the following ways:

• Click Spot Pro from the toolbar in Job Center.



• In Device Center, click Spot Pro under Resources.


3 Find the spot color and click Edit icon ( ) .You can rename a custom spot color or a custom spot color group.


Managing color

104

4 Do one (or a combination) of the following:

• To edit the L*a*b* values directly, click in the L*, a*, or b* field and type a new value. Use the Tab key to movefrom one field to the next. A preview of the converted color is displayed next to Original.

Note: You can click the arrow next to L*a*b* to switch the editing mode to CIE LCH to edit the LCH valuesdirectly. In the LCH mode, you may modify lightness, hue or chroma for the selected spot color.

• Click Measure to measure the L*a*b* values and follow the on-screen instructions.Spot Pro supports the ES-1000 and ES-2000 measurement instruments.

• To edit the CMYK percentage values directly, click in the C, M, Y, or K field and type a new value. Use the Tabkey to move from one field to the next. A preview of the converted color is displayed next to Original.The separation values are computed based on the selected output profile for the given media or substrate. Thismay be particularly useful to remove contaminants or visual artifacts, such as spotting, or a cloudy appearancecaused by black or cyan dots. For CMYK+ profiles, the respective ink separation is available for editing. Forexample, CMYK and Orange and Violet separation values may be edited when a CMYKOV output profile isselected.

• To edit the spot color visually, the currently selected color is reflected in the center patch of the centerhexagon in the lower area of the Spot Pro color editor pane.The active controls for changing the color are the poly-hexagonal shapes. The target color is highlighted. Thehexagons to the left and right represent the next variation of saturation or brightness. The color variationsarrows (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow) show the direction of the color hue shift from the center patch.Clicking on an arrow moves the targeted color in the direction of the arrow.To control the magnitude of variation in the neighboring patches, move the slider closer to Fine (for smallervariation) or Coarse (for larger variation). The Fine or Course slider provides the increment of edit that willoccur per click. The default setting is in the middle.

Note: When you select certain colors, an exclamation point icon may appear in the upper-right corner of theSpot Pro color editor pane. This icon indicates that one or more colorants have reached their maximum values.

5 To print a test page, click the arrow next to Variations and select Print.You may choose the patch layout for the variations, and select the media or substrate source.Matching spot colors accurately on a monitor is very difficult. Always print a test page to get the proper colormatch.


• Click Done to finish editing and to exit the Spot Pro color editor pane.

• Click Cancel to abort editing, exit the Spot Pro color editor pane, and return to the Spot Pro color previewpane.

• Click Save to save your edits and switch to a different spot color, without leaving the Spot Pro color editorpane.

• Click the Reset icon ( ) to revert to the original value of the spot color when created, which is shown in theOriginal.


Managing color

105

Spot color variations

You can print a selected spot color and twenty neighboring colors that have slightly different hues and saturation orbrightness levels from the original spot color. You can choose a spot color variation to replace the original spot colorin your jobs.It is useful to print spot color variations because a perfect ∆E match does not always result in a perfect visual match,due to the non-uniformity of the L*a*b* color space. A spot color that looks color accurate on one media may yield avisibly incorrect color result on a different media.When you create spot color variations, Spot Pro displays three groups of seven color patches in a honeycombpattern. The center patch of the middle group is the original spot color. Each of the surrounding six color patches isa variation of the original spot color in the hue directions of cyan, green, yellow, red, magenta, and blue respectively.The two outer groups of color patches represent an increase and decrease either in saturation or in brightness,whichever you select.

Create spot color variations

You can modify the appearance of a spot color, print and compare the color reproduction of twenty neighboringcolors that have slightly different hues and saturation or brightness levels, and choose one to use.To print variations, you require a media size that is at least 20 cm (8 inches) wide.By default, spot color variations are imported into the Command WorkStation Job Center as "held" jobs, whichmeans you must start the print process manually. You can configure the workflow settings to print jobsautomatically on import.

1 In Spot Pro, under Group, select a custom spot color.The currently selected color is reflected in the center patch of the center hexagon in the lower area of the SpotPro color editor pane under Variations.The active controls for changing the color are the poly-hexagonal shapes. The target color is highlighted. Thehexagons to the left and right represent the next variation of saturation or brightness. The color variations arrows(red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow) show the direction of the color hue shift from the center patch. Clickingon an arrow moves the targeted color in the direction of the arrow.

2 Select a tuning mode, Saturation or Brightness.The tuning mode allows you to make changes to a spot color based on brightness or saturation.Move the Less arrow or More arrow to increase or decrease the percentage of saturation or brightness.

3 To control the magnitude of variation in the neighboring patches, move the slider closer to Fine (for smallervariation) or Coarse (for larger variation).The Fine or Course slider provides the increment of edit that will occur per click. The default setting is in themiddle.

Note: When you select certain colors, an exclamation point icon may appear in the upper-right corner of theSpot Pro color editor pane. This icon indicates that one or more colorants have reached their maximum values.


Managing color

106

4 To print a test page, click the arrow next to Variations and select Print.You may choose the patch layout for the variations, and select the media or substrate source.Matching spot colors accurately on a monitor is very difficult. Always print a test page to get the proper colormatch.

5 Select one of the following pattern layouts:

• Color search pattern - Prints three groups of color patches that are arranged similarly to the honeycombpattern.

• Color neighbor pattern - Prints color patches in a 3 x 7 grid. The middle patch of the top row shows theoriginal spot color. Furthermore, the grid pattern provides details of each color patch's color values.

6 Select the media or substrate source.

7 Click OK.You can print color neighbor patterns for multiple iterations, and then select which color patch to use from eachchart by typing in the desired color values.

Note: If you print the color search pattern, do not exit Spot Pro until the chart has been printed and you haveselected the color patch you want to use.

8 Identify the spot color patch with the best color reproduction and do one of the following:

• Click once on the corresponding patch.This step updates the spot color definition at 100%.

Note: Be aware that the selected color patch becomes the new basis for further spot color variations.Therefore, if you inadvertently click a color patch more than once, further spot color variations are created,based on that color patch. Click Reset icon ( ) to return to the original spot color and its variations.

• Type the color values of the corresponding patch.This step is only possible if you have printed the color neighbor pattern.

Delete a spot color or color group

You can delete a spot color or color group (and the spot colors in the group) if it is not locked.1 Open Device Center in one of the following ways:





2 Click Spot Pro under Resources, and click Launch Spot Pro.

3 Right-click the spot color or group and select Delete.

4 Click Yes to confirm.


Managing color

107

Optimize spot colors

Spot Pro optimizes one or more selected spot colors for a given media or substrate and an output profile.Optimization may reduce the color difference (∆E) and provide a better colorimetric match.Before you begin, connect your measuring instrument to the computer.Spot Pro supports all measurement instruments from FieryMeasure.

1 In Spot Pro, select one or more spot colors.

2 Click Optimize.

3 Select the measurement device and specify the desired settings.

4 Click Next to the Job Properties window.

5 Set the media or substrate source.

Note: Do not change the color settings.

6 Click Print to print a chart of the spot colors to be optimized.

7 Follow the on-screen instructions to measure the chart.

8 Click Next.Spot Pro displays the achieved average ∆E and the maximum ∆E.

9 Click Iterate to repeat the optimization procedure until no further optimization is possible. In the optimizationtable, click the best set of results, and then click Finish to save your optimization.

Gamut warning

The color gamut describes the full range of colors that the printer can reproduce. During job processing, spot colorsthat are out of gamut are mapped to the nearest possible color within the available color gamut. The deviation incolor is displayed as a ∆E value. If a spot color cannot be reproduced within the user specified tolerance, a gamutwarning will be shown.Spot Pro supports specifying the tolerance in different ∆E formulae (∆E2000, ∆E76) by allowing spot colors that liewithin this tolerance area to be accepted as "in gamut".Spot Pro will show the color graded ∆E for each spot color, which will be in the user specified ∆E format.The ∆E column shows if the spot color can be accurately reproduced. Green indicates “in gamut”. Red indicates “outof gamut”. Be aware that it is possible for a spot color to yield a ∆E that exceeds the defined tolerance limit for thatcolor, but still be within the printer’s gamut.If a spot color is out of gamut, you may be able to reduce the ∆E value. Try the following:

• Switch to a different media or substrate. In this way, you can quickly find out which combination will producethe best results.

• Optimize a spot color.


Managing color

108

Color swatch pages and swatch books

You can print a swatch page for an individual spot color containing all its neighboring spot colors. You can also printa swatch book for a color group containing all of the spot colors in the group or selected colors in the group.

Spot color matching

When you print a spot color swatches or a swatch book, the output profile and the media or substrate sourcecombination are the primary job properties necessary to print accurately. You select the output profile, in the SpotPro color pane window, and the media tray or media source, in the print swatch book workflow after clicking Print inthe toolbar or in the right-click menu. Default job properties for the rest of the settings are used, which do not haveconsiderable impact on the color accuracy.

Calibration

Calibrating the Fiery server ensures consistent and reliable color output. Calibration adjusts for variations in thecolor output of the printer, which changes over time and under different printing conditions.

Print a color swatch page or swatch book

You print a color swatch page for a single spot color. You print a swatch book for a group of spot colors.

Print a swatch book of one or more spot colors

When you print a swatch book, you select one or more spot colors and a layout.1 In Spot Pro, select one or more spot colors.

You can hold the shift key to drag and select consecutive colors or hold the ctrl or command key to select ordeselect specific colors.To select spot colors from multiple spot color libraries, drag the spot colors from the internal spot color librariesto the custom spot color section.

2 Click Print or right-click to select Print from the menu.

Note: Depending on the Fiery server, you may have a Print, Print to queue or Send to printing option.

3 Select a patch size.The size in shown in mm or inches based on the Command WorkStation regional settings.

4 Select a chart size.Custom chart sizes width and height can be defined between 5.0 inches and 39.37 inches.The chart size will also be limited to the largest media that the printer or press can handle.

5 Select a media or substrate source.

6 Click OK to print a spot color swatch book.


Managing color

109

If the chart size dimension is greater than the paper size available through the paper source, a warning message willappear and the OK button will be disabled.The job appears as a multiple page PDF file in Command WorkStation Job Center. In the printed job, the spot colorname, and the CMYK color values are printed under each color patch.

Print a swatch book of all spot colors in a group

When you print a swatch book, you select a spot color group and a layout.1 In Spot Pro, select one color group.

Note: Only one color group can be printed at a time.

2 Click Print or right-click to select Print from the menu.

Note: Depending on the Fiery server, you may have a Print, Print to queue or Send to printing option.

3 Select a patch size.The size in shown in mm or inches based on the Command WorkStation regional settings.

4 Select a chart size.Custom chart sizes width and height can be defined between 5.0 inches and 39.37 inches.The chart size will also be limited to the largest media that the printer or press can handle.

5 Select a media or substrate source.

6 Click OK to print a spot color swatch book.

If the chart size dimension is greater than the paper size available through the paper source, a warning message willappear and the OK button will be disabled.The job appears as a multiple page PDF file in Command WorkStation Job Center. In the printed job, the spot colorname, and the CMYK color values are printed under each color patch.

Substitute colors

The Substitute Colors feature is used to map a color in a job to a different color in the printed job.Color substitutions affect only text, vector graphics, and line art. They have no effect on raster images.When a color is defined as a substitute color, the settings for an RGB color (such as RGB source) or CMYK color(such as CMYK source) have no effect. The color is converted with a process similar to spot color conversion.

CAUTION You cannot use the Substitute Colors and Postflight features at the same time. These print options areconstrained.

Substitute colors are not supported for CMYK+ color mode and associated output profiles.Using the Substitute Colors feature involves the following tasks:

• Configure the substitute color values in Command WorkStation.

• Print a document with the Substitute colors print option turned on.


Managing color

110

Create and edit substitute colors

A substitute color resides in a special type of spot color group called a substitute group. For a substitute color, youspecify the CMYK value of the original color and the CMYK value of the color that substitutes for the original color.1 Start Spot Pro in one of the following ways:

• Click Spot Pro from the toolbar in Job Center.



• In Device Center, click Spot Pro under Resources.


3 Click New and select Substitute Group.For a substitute group, type a name for the group and click OK.If a substitute group already exists, select the substitute group and proceed to 5.

4 Select the location in the color list where you want the new substitute color to be placed.

5 Click New and select Substitute Color to create a substitute color.

6 Select a color mode for specifying the original color value.

7 Select a tolerance degree for the original color.Tolerance determines how close a particular color must be to the original color to match. Small and Large aredefined as follows:

Color mode Small tolerance range Large tolerance range

CMYK (0-100%) +/- 0.25% +/- 0.5%

RGB (Device Code 0-255) +/- 0.25 +/- 1

RGB (0-100%) +/- 0.25% +/- 0.5%

Note: Tolerance does not affect the substituted color.

8 Type the values for the original color. Use the Tab key to move from one field to the next.

9 Type the values for the converted color.





Managing color

111

11 To edit a substitute color, in the Spot Pro color editor pane, click Edit icon ( ). Make the necessary changes anddo one of the following:




Managing color

112

Metrix Quick Impose

Metrix Quick Impose is an imposition software that automatically and dynamically determines how many presssheets you need and the optimum layout for each press sheet.The Metrix Quick Impose software has two versions, Metrix Standard and Metrix Premium. The license for MetrixStandard is preactivated on the Fiery server. To use the Metrix Premium version, you must activate the license.

Note: Metrix is an option and is available if the Fiery server supports it.Metrix is installed as part of the software utilities of the Fiery server and can be accessed either from Fiery CommandWorkStation or from the Metrix application. Metrix can be installed on any client computer and if you do not haveMetrix installed on your client computer, you will not be able to open the Metrix Quick Impose window.In the Metrix Quick Impose window, you can set or modify properties and export the job using an export profilesuch as PDF, JDF, PDF proof, or JDF proof.

Using Metrix Quick Impose

Metrix Standard is the basic version that works with a single Fiery server. With Metrix Standard, you can open asingle job at a time in the Metrix Quick Impose window. Users of Metrix Standard have access to Auto Layout, afeature that optimizes substrate usage with minimum user interaction.Metrix Premium is the licensed version that has the capability of working with multiple presses and enables the userto open multiple jobs simultaneously. Users of Metrix Premium have access to the Auto Plan and Auto Productionfeatures. Auto Plan is an extension of the Auto Layout feature, wherein users can simultaneously process multiplejobs. Auto Production distributes jobs across multiple presses, depending on the capabilities of the press.

Standalone Metrix

You can open the standalone Metrix application directly without having to open Metrix Quick Impose from FieryCommand WorkStation.See Open standalone Metrix on page 113.

Open standalone Metrix

You can open the standalone Metrix application for either Metrix Standard or Metrix Premium. To use thestandalone Metrix application for Metrix Premium, you must activate the license. You must also be connected to theFiery server.You can directly open the standalone Metrix application without having to use Fiery Command WorkStation.


Metrix Quick Impose

113

Note: Before opening the standalone Metrix application, you must shut down Fiery Command WorkStation.

1 Browse to the location of the Metrix application and double-click the Metrix.exe file.The default location is:

• Windows: C: > Program Files > EFI > Metrix

• Mac OS: Go > Applications > EFI > Metrix

The Metrix application opens.

2 Click File > Open Project or click the Open icon in the tool bar.

3 In the Open Project window, select From Fiery.

4 Select the Fiery server from the Select Fiery menu.The Fiery server lists all PDF jobs.

5 Click the job you want to open.The Metrix window opens. You can drag and drop a PDF job to the Metrix Properties window to open MetrixQuick Impose, provided a Fiery server and a Substrate Catalog entry have been added.

6 Specify properties as required.

Open Metrix Quick Impose from Fiery Command WorkStation

Opening Metrix Quick Impose for your job automatically imposes the job on the selected sheet size. Binding andfolding specifications are incorporated into the layout.Note the following before opening a job in Metrix Quick Impose:

• The job must be PDF file format.

• If the job is flatwork, it must have either one or two pages.

Note: If the job has two pages, the information will be imposed on the front and back of a single page. If the jobhas one page, the information will be imposed only on the front.

• The PDF job must have an even number of pages, specifically, 2, 6, or divisible by 4. If the job has an odd numberof pages, users will be prompted to add blank pages to the job to satisfy this requirement.

• The document size cannot be bigger than any substrate size supported by the press.

• Substrate Catalog entries must be defined.

1 Import a job into the Held list in Fiery Command WorkStation.Do not process the job, because processed jobs cannot be opened in Metrix Quick Impose.

2 Open the spooled job in Metrix Quick Impose in one of the following ways:

• Right-click the job and select Metrix Quick Impose.

• Select the job and choose Metrix Quick Impose from the Actions menu.

The job opens in the Metrix Quick Impose window and a layout is automatically created. Thumbnails aregenerated in the background, so you can preview the content of the laid out job in Metrix Quick Impose.


Metrix Quick Impose

114

You can set the properties for the layout. Pause Layout Generation stops the constant generation of layoutswhenever a change is made to properties.

The Metrix Quick Impose window

The Metrix Quick Impose window displays the layout of your job.Your job is automatically imposed according to default properties. You can edit any of the fields in the properties listthat have a white background. Items with a gray background cannot be edited.

Element Description

Layout Preview of imposition of the job on the sheet. Measurements of the sheet are also displayed withthe layout.

Navigation arrows Moves through the sheets.

Preview button Toggles the preview from wire frame to actual content.

Side 1/Side 2 controls Toggles the preview from side 1 to side 2 of the sheet, if it is a two-sided job.

Properties thumbnail Displays the original job with measurements.

QuickSet field Allows you to select from any saved QuickSets, or create new ones.

Pause Layout Generation Pauses the generation of layouts. This can save time when you are making changes to properties.

Properties list Items in white are editable.

Launch Metrix button Opens Metrix.

Export button Exports the job as JDF, JDF Proof, PDF, or PDF proof to the Command WorkStation Held list

Cancel button Exits the Metrix Quick Impose window and closes the job without making any changes.

Properties in Metrix Quick Impose

A number of properties can be modified in the Metrix Quick Impose window.The properties displayed vary according to the properties of the job. If a property field is grayed out, you cannotmake changes.

Item Options Description

Project Name Enter text The user enters a name for the project.

Product Name Select jobs to display Shows all open jobs.

Customer List of available customersfrom the Metrix database.

Customers entered into the Metrix database can be selected to associatewith the currently open project.


Metrix Quick Impose

115


Product Type Flat

Folded

Bound - Saddle Stitch

Bound - Perfect

Diecut

The type of finished product. This is determined by the sheet size and thenumber of pages in the job.

A bound saddle-stitched, or perfect job is dependent on the availablefolding equipment.

Note: For a one page job, only the Flat option is displayed in the drop-downmenu. For jobs that have pages in the range of two-seven, the Flat or Foldedoption can be displayed. For jobs that consist of eight pages or more and thepage count is divisible by four, the Bound options are displayed.

Note: The Diecut option is available when the job contains:

• A spot color separation.

• A spot color separation with a name recognized by the die name libraryon the Fiery server.

If the spot color separation is recognized by the Fiery server, Product Typeis set to Diecut by default.

Die Cutter Tool Name of matched dielines.

Die Cutter Tool is only available if Diecut is selected as the Product Type.

If the die line matches an existing outline from the die name library on theFiery server, the name of the matching die line and the percent it matcheswill be available from the menu.

Match Manually is available by default.

Binding Side Left

Left (Calendar)

Right

Right (Calendar)

If the job requires bound work, you can specify the side of the binding edgein the layout.

Note: If the job is flat work, the Binding Side property field will not bedisplayed.

Combine Pages Cannot be edited Can be used to create a folded product from a two-page flat job, such as amap, when changing the number of pages field from 2 to 16, 24, 32, etc.

Requiredquantity

Enter number of copiesrequired.

The default is 1,000.

Finished Width Enter size The width of the finished job. If you change the height or the width of thefinished job, Metrix Quick Impose changes the layout. Scaling is notpossible. If you make the height and width smaller, Metrix centers andcrops the content.

Finished Height Enter size The height of the finished job.


Metrix Quick Impose

116


Product Grain Either

Either-All Same

Horizontal

Vertical

Product grain, which is the parameter in Metrix, is different from the sheetgrain, which is the parameter in Job Properties. The following options areavailable in the drop-down menu:

• Either: The pages will be laid out both horizontally and vertically tobest fit the sheet size.

• Either-All Same: The layout of all pages will be the same to best fit thesheet size.

• Horizontal: The pages will be laid out in the horizontal direction basedon the grain direction of the substrate.

• Vertical: The pages will be laid out in the vertical direction based on thegrain direction of the substrate.

Note: Product Grain is read-only when Product Type is set to Diecut.

Bleeds (AllEdges)

Enter measurement Bleeds are the space between the products on the sheet.

Note: Bleeds is read-only when Product Type is set to Diecut.

Number of Pages Cannot be edited unlesscreating a folded productfrom a 2-page flat.

Number of pages in the PDF.

Largest TextComponents

Drop-down list ofavailable number of pageson a signature.

Indicates the number of pages that can fit per signature in a job. Thisoption is dependent on the page size and the sheet size of the substrate.

Fold Cannot be edited Folds are determined by the number of pages and the JDF folding sequencethat will be used. The user can choose any of the JDF folding sequences thathave already been defined in the Metrix database or create a new sequenceas required.

Binding Machine Either perfect binding orsaddle stitch

This option is displayed only if your job requires bound work.

Binding Machine options are displayed depending on the options selectedin the Product Type field. The Binding Machine options are:

Perfect Binder: Displayed when Bound - Perfect is selected in the ProductType field.

Stitcher Trimmer: Displayed when Bound - Saddle Stitch is selected in theProduct Type field.

Stock Select a stock from theStock Selector in Metrix.

Clicking Stock opens the Stock Selector in Metrix. You must have SubstrateCatalog entries already defined before opening a job in Metrix QuickImpose.

Sheet Size Choose the sheet size ofthe stock you selected.

When you have selected a stock, the Sheet Size menu displays all the sheetsizes available for that stock.


Metrix Quick Impose

117


Printing Method One-Sided

Sheetwise

Work and Turn

Work and Tumble

Perfected

The printing method for this layout. Perfected is available only when theselected press is capable of perfecting as defined in the Metrix database.

Side 1 Press Cannot be edited Connected Fiery-driven press

Press InspectionZone

True

False

Designated area on the sheet for press calibration marks.

Mark Set No Mark Set

Default marks set

Marks sets created inMetrix

Metrix automatically loads a default marks set when connected to the Fieryserver. The default marks set is included with the installation.

Export Profile JDF

JDF proof

PDF

PDF proof

The export profile generates layouts for the press. If you select PDF or JDF,each PDF or JDF is a separate layout. If you select PDF proof or JDF proof,all layouts are combined in the file. The profile is exported to the FieryCommand WorkStation Held list. See Export a job from Metrix QuickImpose on page 120.

Create QuickSets

You can create QuickSets in Metrix Quick Impose or choose from existing QuickSets.To create a new QuickSet, choose the properties you want for the job. You can also choose an existing QuickSetfrom the list.

Note: When you choose an existing QuickSet, only those QuickSets that have the same Product Type and the samenumber of pages as your job are displayed.

1 In the QuickSet field, type the name you want to give your QuickSet.The Save icon becomes available.

2 Click the Save icon.The QuickSet is added to the list.

3 To delete a QuickSet, select it and click the Delete icon.


Metrix Quick Impose

118

4 To apply a QuickSet, select a spooled job from the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list, and do any one of thefollowing:

• Right-click a spooled job and select Apply Metrix QuickSet.

• Select Apply Metrix QuickSet from the Actions menu.

Note: The arrow next to Apply Metrix QuickSet displays the list of available QuickSets. For jobs that have beenpreviously imposed, the Apply Metrix QuickSet option is not displayed. This prevents the job from being imposedtwice.Metrix applies the QuickSet to the job and a new job is created with MTX_LYT as part of the filename andsubmitted to the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list.

When applying QuickSets, note the following:

• The Apply Metrix QuickSet option will not be displayed when multiple jobs are selected.

• If you specify the number of copies in Job Properties, the Required Quantity field will not be overwritten by theQuickSet. If the number of copies is not specified, it will default to 1000.

Export Profiles in Metrix Quick Impose

Jobs that have been modified in Metrix Quick Impose can be exported to the Fiery Command WorkStation Held listin preparation for printing.To export jobs from Metrix Quick Impose, you must select an export profile. The following export profiles areavailable:

• JDF

• JDF Proof

• PDF

• PDF Proof

Depending on the export profile that you choose, the following are applicable:

• In the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list, the exported layouts will have MTX_LYT as part of the file name,with the file extension as either .pdf or .jdf, depending on your selection. If you choose JDF or PDF, each layoutwill be numbered, as in "MTX_LYT01", "MTX_LYT02", and so forth.

• If you select PDF or JDF, each PDF or JDF is exported as a separate layout. A file with layers needs to be exportedas JDF. If the file contains layers and if PDF is selected, then the Export button will be disabled.

• If you select PDF proof or JDF proof, only one file will be created with all the layouts for the job. When youexport the job, registration marks are added.


Metrix Quick Impose

119

• If you select PDF proof or JDF proof and export the job, the Copies column in Fiery Command WorkStation willdisplay the number 1. The Copies column indicates the number of sheets required to print the required quantityof the finished product.If you select PDF or JDF, depending on the number that you entered in the Required Quantity field in theProperties list in the Metrix Quick Impose window, the Copies column in Fiery Command WorkStation displaysthe number of copies (sheets) required to print the job. For example, if the job is to print 1000 postcards, enterthe number 1000 in the Required Quantity field in the Properties list in the Metrix Quick Impose window. Whenyou export the job as PDF or JDF, based upon the imposition method applied, the number of copies (sheets)required to print the job will be calculated and displayed in the Copies column in Fiery Command WorkStation.

• When you export a job from Metrix Quick Impose, the properties of the job are written into the Metrix database.If you delete the job, it is deleted from the Metrix database and from the Fiery server.

Export a job from Metrix Quick Impose

Open a spooled job in Metrix Quick Impose and select the editable properties that you want to change.When you are satisfied with the layout of your job, you can export the job to the Fiery Command WorkStation Heldlist.

1 Select from the following Export Profiles:

• JDF

• JDF Proof

• PDF

• PDF Proof

2 Click the Export button.The exported layout is listed in the Fiery Command WorkStation Held list with MTX_LYT as part of the filename and a file extension of either .pdf or .jdf, depending on your selection. If JDF or PDF is selected as an exportprofile, each exported layout will be numbered, for example "MTX_LYT01", "MTX_LYT02", and so forth.

3 To preview an exported layout, open the spooled job in Fiery Preview in one of the following ways:




The job opens in the Fiery Preview window. If the job has layers and you exported it as JDF, you will be able tocreate versions in Fiery Preview.

4 Process and hold the job. After the job is processed, right-click and choose ImageViewer to view the job.


Metrix Quick Impose

120

Multi-up layout for existing die in Metrix

The Multi-up layout for existing die feature identifies matching die cutting tools based on the spot color separationwithin a job. Die cutting tools are matched to an existing n-up die cut tool thereby enabling the placement of the jobcontent to a layout saved on the Fiery server.You can access the Multi-up layout feature from Metrix Quick Impose. The Multi-up layout for existing die featuresearches the die name library on the Fiery server for a matching spot color separation to identify the exact or closestdie line in your job.You can also manually choose a die line for your job by:

• Selecting a die line from the die cutting tool database.

• Adding a new die line.

• Creating a variation of an existing die line.

• Importing an existing die line.

If multiple named spot color separations are identified as an exact or close match to an existing named spot colorseparation in the die name library, you can select your preferred n-up option.If no matching die line is found for your die cutting tool, the Matching Dies dialog box displays "No Match Found".

The Select Die Cutting Tool window

The Select Die Cutting Tool window allows you to perform a variety of tasks without exiting Metrix Quick Impose.In the Select Die Cutting Tool window, you can:

• Manually choose a die cutting tool.

• Add a new die cutting tool.

• Create a variation of an existing die cutting tool.

• Import a die cutting tool.

• Export a die cutting tool.

• Search the die cutting tool library for specific die cutting tools.

Note: The Edit and Delete options are unavailable from the Select Die Cutting Tool window. To edit or delete anexisting die cutting tool, you can click Launch Metrix from the Metrix Quick Impose window, close the job, and openthe Metrix Database window.


Metrix Quick Impose

121

Open the Select Die Cutting Tool window

Open the Select Die Cutting Tool window in one of the following ways:

• Select Match Manually from the Die Cutting Tool menu in the Properties pane if your job is automaticallymatched to a die line layout.

Note: If the spot color separation is matched to multiple die lines, the Die Cutting Tool menu will list allmatching die lines from the database and the percentage by which the die lines match.

• Click Match Manually in the Matching Dies window if your job is automatically matched to multiple die lines ordid not match any die lines saved to the Fiery server.

Add a new die cutting tool item

You can manually add a new die cutting tool to the die cutting tool database.In the Select Die Cutting Tool window:

1 Click Add New.

2 Specify the properties in the New Die Cutting Tool window.The Anchor to option in the Previews pane allows you to further control your die cutting tool placement on thesheet when you choose one of the following:

• Die File: Moves the die cutting tool on the sheet closer to the right feed edge.

• Bounding Box: Moves the die cutting tool on the sheet within the displayed bounding box.

3 Click OK.

Add a new die line from spot color separations

You can add a desired die line manually from your 1-up or n-up input files in the Add Dieline Color from window.1 Click Die Color in the Matching Dies window to open the Add Dieline Color window.

Alternatively, click 1-up Die or Multi-up Die in the Previews pane in the New Die Cutting Tool window.

2 Select the desired die line from the Possible Dieline colors pane.

3 Click Add.

4 Click OK.

Create a die cutting tool variation

You can duplicate and edit existing die cutting tools to create variations.In the Select Die Cutting Tool window:

1 Click Variation.


Metrix Quick Impose

122

2 Specify the properties in the New Variation Die Cutting Tool window.The Anchor to option in the Previews pane allows you to further control your die cutting tool placement on thesheet when you choose one of the following:

• Die File: Move the die cutting tool on the sheet closer to the right feed edge.

• Bounding Box: Move the die cutting tool on the sheet within the displayed bounding box.

3 Click OK.

Import a die cutting tool

You can directly import a die cutting tool into the die cutting tool database from the Select Die Cutting Tool window.1 Click Import from the Select Die Cutting Tool toolbar.

2 Select the die cutting tool from the MXML Import window.

3 Click Import.

Export a die cutting tool

You can export a die cutting tool from the die cutting tool database from the Select Die Cutting Tool window.1 Select the die cutting tool you want to export from the Select Die Cutting Tool database.

2 Click Export.

3 Navigate to the folder you want to export your die cutting tool.

4 Click Save.

Search for a die cutting tool

You can search for and locate die cutting tools in the Select Die Cutting Tool window using search parameters, suchas the name, device ID, or specific numeric values for sheet size or offset. This allows you to quickly locate die cuttools in the database without exiting the Select Die Cutting Tool window.Do one of the following:

• Simple search: Type your criteria in the Search field.

• Advanced search: Click Advanced in the Select Die Cutting Tool window.


Metrix Quick Impose

123

Simple die cutting tool search

You can search the die cutting tool database in the Select Die Cutting Tool window for die cutting tools with specificcriteria.1 Type your search criteria into the Search field located above the die cutting tool database in Select Die Cutting

Tool window.

2 Press Enter or click the magnifying glass icon (Search icon) to locate the jobs that meet the specified searchcriteria.The typed text is not case sensitive. Searches are performed across all columns in the Select Die Cutting Toolwindow.

Note: If columns are hidden from view, enlarge the Select Die Cutting Tool window.Click X (Clear search icon) to clear the current search criteria.

Advanced die cutting tool search

You can use the Advanced function to search by multiple criteria (columns) simultaneously in the current view.1 To open the Die Tool Advanced Search window, click Advanced next to X (Clear search icon).

2 Specify the search criteria.

3 Click OK to locate the jobs that meet the specified search parameters.

Die Cutting Tool properties

The Die Cutting Tool properties appear when you add a new die cutting tool or create a variation of an existing diecutting tool. You can also perform an advanced search using some of the properties.

Note: If a property field is grayed out, you cannot make changes.

Element Description

1-up Die The single die line shape.

The die cutting tool database supports .pdf, .cf2, .dd3, and .dxf file formats.

Multi-up Die Multiple die line shapes in a layout.

The die cutting tool database supports .pdf, .cf2, .dd3, and .dxf file formats.

Allowed Bleed Intrusion Opens the Bleed Intrusion Window where you can specify the bleed overlap.

Die Cutter Tool Type The type of die cutting tool.

• Flat

• Rotary


Metrix Quick Impose

124

Element Description

Anchor to Sheet The starting position of the die cutting tool on the sheet.

Choose from the following options:

• Center

• Top

• Top Right

• Right

• Bottom Right

• Bottom

• Bottom Left

• Left

• Top Left

You can also use the adjacent grid to define the starting position on the sheet.

Anchor Horizontal Offset The distance from the anchor point on the sheet along the X axis.

Anchor Vertical Offset The distance from the anchor point on the sheet along the Y axis.

Number Up The number of die lines cut per sheet.

Number Across Number of die lines cut along the sheet on the X axis.

Number Along Number of die lines cut along the sheet on the Y axis.

Streams Columns designated to repeatedly print a single product using roll fed equipment. Specify thenumber of streams for a multi-up die.

Streams Number Across Number of die line items in each stream along the X axis.

Manufacturer The manufacturer of the die cutting tool.

Model Name The model name of the die cutting tool.

Model Number The model number of the die cutting tool.

Serial Number The serial number of the die cutting tool.


Metrix Quick Impose

125

Managing server resources

Fiery system software updates and patches

Command WorkStation includes the Fiery Updates feature for installing updates and patches for Fiery systemsoftware and Fiery API. This allows system software updates to be installed from either the Fiery server or remotecomputers. This also allows updates and patches to be installed without requiring the Fiery server to be connected tothe Internet.To access Fiery Updates, start Command WorkStation.The computer running Command WorkStation must:

• Be connected to the Internet

• Be on the same network as the Fiery server

Updates and patches can be installed onto the Fiery server from only one computer at a time. System Updates mustbe disabled to allow patches to be installed.

Update Fiery server system software through Command WorkStation

You can update Fiery system software from a client computer or locally at the Fiery server.The Fiery server name or IP address is required to connect to the Fiery server in Command WorkStation.

Note: Client computer must have an active internet connection to perform the Fiery server system updates.

Note: For best results, install updates and patches when no jobs or actions are in progress on the Fiery server or inCommand WorkStation.

1 Start Command WorkStation.

2 Select Server > Device Center > FIERY UPDATES > Updates.

3 To view and install the available updates, click Updates underneath FIERY UPDATES, then click Update in theright pane for each update that you want to install.

4 To view the available patches, click Patches underneath FIERY UPDATES.

5 Select the patches to install.When you select a patch, any required previous patches are also automatically selected.

6 If a message about Fiery API displays, click OK to install Fiery API.Fiery API is required to perform patch installations with Fiery Updates.



126

7 Click Update to install the selected patches.The Fiery server must be rebooted after installing every exclusive patch.

Note: You can install multiple non-exclusive patches along with each exclusive patch.

8 Click OK to reboot the Fiery server after updates and patches are installed.

Note: The administrator must reconnect to the Fiery server in Command WorkStation after the reboot iscomplete.

Note: Command WorkStation connected to Fiery server displays a notification when the patch installation is inprogress.

9 To view a list of the updates and patches that are installed, click History underneath FIERY UPDATES.

Examine server performance and security

Fiery Health Monitor helps keep your Fiery server secure and running in its most efficient condition to face thedemands of a production print environment by keeping constant track of the overall system health and presenting alist of preventative actions.

Keep the server running at its best

1 Start Fiery Health Monitor by one of these methods.

• In the upper-right corner of Job Center under the Partner logo, click the Fiery Health Monitor link.

• Select Server > Fiery Health Monitor.

• Right-click the Fiery server name and select Health Monitor.

2 Click one of the tools.

• Fiery Updates (if supported by your Fiery server) installs updates and patches for Fiery system software andFiery API: Update Fiery server system software through Command WorkStation on page 126

• Disk Space accesses the Clear Server feature, allowing you to clear jobs, logs, and VDP resources: Clear Serveron page 70

• Optimize restarts the Fiery server (same action as selecting Server > Restart Fiery)

• Archive Manager archives jobs outside of the Fiery server: Archive jobs on page 65

• Fiery Backup Schedule (if supported by your Fiery server) sets a daily or weekly schedule for automaticbackups. This opens WebTools in a default browser window. If browser security errors appear, you can dismissthem and continue.



127

Virtual printers

Virtual printers give users a way to print to the Fiery server using predefined job settings. Virtual printers arepublished on the network so users can set them up as a printer on their computer.Administrators can manage virtual printers in Command WorkStation. They can duplicate the print and hold virtualprinters and modify their settings. Administrators can also create new virtual printers.When a virtual printer in the list is selected, its job properties are displayed on the panel at the right in DeviceCenter > Workflows > Virtual Printers as well as the toolbar that provides access to various tasks.Administrators can publish job presets as virtual printers. See Preset print settings on page 47.

Set Defaults

The Set Defaults feature allows you to customize the Fiery server by modifying the default properties of a job.

Create, edit, or duplicate virtual printers

Only Administrators can create, edit, and duplicate virtual printers. Administrators can also publish job presets asvirtual printers.


• To create a virtual printer, click New in the toolbar.

• To edit a virtual printer, click Edit in the toolbar.

• To duplicate a virtual printer, click Duplicate in the toolbar.

2 Specify the following:

• Printer Name - This is the alphanumeric name of the virtual printer.

Note: Once a virtual printer has been created or duplicated, its name cannot be changed, although the printsettings can be changed.

• Description - Add or modify comments to describe the virtual printer to users—for example, "companybrochure."

• Job Actions - Select one of the Fiery server actions, such as Hold, or Process and Hold.

• Job Properties - Select Define to access Job Properties and specify print settings. Server presets are also listed aschoices.

Note: You can lock any job setting by clicking its lock icon.



128

3 If required, select Preflight and edit the settings:

• Default preset - Indicates that the default Preflight settings will be used unless you edit them.

• Edit - Allows you to select from other presets or specify each setting.

• On critical error - Specifies the action to be performed if any critical errors are found. Use Job Action refers tothe job action specified for the virtual printer.

Locked job settings

Locking a job setting prevents other users from changing the setting.Note the following:

• Importing a job to Command WorkStation using a virtual printer - The imported job uses the locked settingson the Fiery server and overrides any conflicting settings that came with the job.

• Unlocked job settings - The user can change job settings, and the job prints according to these settings. But if ajob setting is not specified, the job uses the virtual printer setting.

Publish job presets as virtual printers

A server job preset can be published as a virtual printer.1 In Device Center, click Workflows, and then click Job Presets.

2 Select a preset and click Publish as Virtual Printer.

3 In the New Virtual Printer dialog box, specify settings.

Note: You can specify all the settings except for Job Properties. The job properties used are those specified for theserver preset.

Manage virtual printers

The Fiery server Administrator can publish, unpublish, or delete a virtual printer.• Select a virtual printer in the list and click one of the following in the toolbar:

• Publish to publish the selected virtual printer on the network.The virtual printer is shared over the network when SMB printing is enabled in Server Configuration.

• Unpublish to remove the selected virtual printer from the network.The virtual printer no longer appears as a shared printer. It also no longer appears as a printer you can importjobs to in Command WorkStation.

• Delete to delete the selected virtual printer.



129

VDP resources

VDP (Variable Data Printing) jobs use global and reusable resources for variable elements inside jobs.Global resources are required images that must be downloaded to the Fiery server for VDP jobs with variableelements. These global resources are stored on the Fiery server as a group inside each individual project.VDP Resources allows an Administrator to manage disk space on the Fiery server by:

• Viewing and deleting global resources

• Allowing global resources to reside for future VDP jobs

• Archiving and restoring global resources to the Fiery server

To access VDP Resources, connect to the Fiery server, click the More icon (three vertical dots), and choose DeviceCenter > Resources > VDP Resources.

Back up VDP resources

You can back up global resources.

Back up global resources for a project

Using Device Center’s VDP Resources feature, you can back up projects in a separate file.Backup and restore are not available for PDF/VT jobs.

1 Connect to the desired Fiery server and click Device Center > Resources > VDP Resources.

2 Click a VDP folder to display the list of available projects.

3 Select the project that you want to archive and click Backup.

4 Specify the location in which to save the file, and then click OK.

Restore VDP resources

You can restore archived global resources.

Restore archived global resources for a project

Archived jobs can only be restored to the Fiery server where the files were originally archived.

Note: VDP languages without global resources do not appear in VDP Resources. VDP languages for which globalresources have been restored appear in VDP Resources.



130

1 Click Restore.

2 Navigate to the location of the archived file, select the file, and then click Restore.

View and delete global resources

You can view global resources as well as job name information for a project.1 Connect to the desired Fiery server and click Device Center > Resources > VDP Resources.

2 To view global resources, click a project and click List View or Thumbnail View from the View menu (if your Fieryserver supports it).

3 To view submitted job name information and resources for a project, click a project and click Resources or Jobs(if your Fiery server supports it).

4 To delete global resources, click a VDP language or a project, and then click Delete.

5 To update current information, click Refresh (if your Fiery server supports it).

Fonts

The Fonts management window lists all PostScript and PCL fonts resident on the Fiery server. You can backup andrestore only PostScript fonts on the Fiery server, as well as select Local Printer to print the list.

Manage fonts on the Fiery server

You can add, update, and delete fonts, as well as print a font list.In Configure, the Security > PostScript Security feature must disabled and the Job Submission > Queues > PublishFont Queue feature must be enabled to allow downloading with third-party font download applications. For securityreasons, enable the Font Queue only while installing fonts.

Note: The PCL option is available on a Fiery server that supports it. Support is limited to viewing the PCL Font List.PCL font downloading is not available.

Note: All Japanese fonts resident on the server or downloaded by a supported application are locked. Japanese fontsdownloaded to the Fiery server can only be deleted by the installing application.






2 Click Resources > Fonts.A list of the fonts that currently reside on the Fiery server appears.



131

3 Manage the fonts by using the toolbar buttons:

• To add or update fonts, click Add New. (You can add Adobe PostScript Type 1 fonts.) Click Add to locate thefont that you wish to download, and then click OK and Refresh.

• To delete a font, select an unlocked font in the Font List and click Delete. Locked fonts cannot be deleted.

• To print the Font List, click Print.

Back up and restore fonts

You can back up and restore only PostScript fonts. All PostScript fonts are backed up or restored; you cannot selectindividual fonts.

Note: You must be logged in as Administrator to back up and restore fonts on the Fiery server.






2 Click Resources > Fonts.

3 Click Backup or Restore.

4 In the window that appears, select Fonts from the list and follow the prompts. Observe these guidelines:

• Do not back up fonts to an internal hard drive that also contains the Fiery server.

• You must restore fonts only to the same Fiery server from which the fonts were originally backed up.

Users and Groups

You can define privileges for the users who access the Fiery server by assigning them to groups. Several groups areprovided by default. All users in a group have the same privileges.You can view detailed information about users and groups from Configure > User Accounts.In addition to assigning to a group the users that you have created, you can add users from your organization's globaladdress list. To do so, you must first enable LDAP services on the Fiery server.



132

View groups

With Groups, Administrators can add users to a group that has defined privileges.

Note: Groups may not be supported for all Fiery servers.To modify users and group privileges, click Configure. For more information, see Change group privileges on page28.

Use the Job Log

The Job Log preserves a record of all processed and printed jobs, the date and time they were printed, and theircharacteristics.

Note: If an Administrator clears the Fiery server or installs new software, the Job Log may also be cleared.An Administrator can set automated Job Log maintenance in Configure, such as scheduling a day and time to exportand clear the Job Log.For more information about how to manage the Job Log in Configure, see Configure Help.

View the Job Log

1 Connect to the desired Fiery server and do one of the following:

• Click the More icon (three dots) next to the server name, choose Device Center, and then click Logs > Job Log.

• Click Server > Logs.

2 Specify the date range of jobs you want to view in the From and To fields.

3 To view all jobs, click Clear Filter.

Customize Job Log columns

1 Right-click a column header.

2 Select Add.

3 In the list of available columns, select the column to add.

4 To delete a column, right-click the column header and select Delete.

5 To change the order of columns, select the column header and drag it to another location.



133

View Job Log entry details

You can view more details about an entry in the Job Log. You can copy the text using standard Windows or macOScontrols to select, select all, copy, and so on. Also, you can print the details to the Fiery server or a local printer.• Select the row and click Details in the toolbar, or double-click the row.

The first 10 columns are displayed in a vertical format, allowing more information to be seen at a glance andprinted.

Print the Job Log




2 Click Print.

3 Select Local Printer, select a printer, and then click Print.

Export the contents of the Job Log




2 Click Export.

3 Select Current View to export the current date range view of the Job Log or select Complete Log to export theentire Job Log, regardless of the date range specified in your view.

Export and/or clear the contents of the Job Log



• Double-click the server name in the Servers pane to open Device Center, and then select Logs > Job Log.




134


• Click Export and Clear.

• Click Clear.



135

Substrate Catalog

Substrate Catalog is a system-based substrate warehouse database, which can store attributes of any substrateavailable in a production print shop.Substrate Catalog is installed by default with Command WorkStation.The Substrate Catalog database resides on the Fiery server and is not affected when you reboot or clear the Fieryserver.

Note: To set up and manage Substrate Catalog, you must log in to Command WorkStation with Administratoraccess.To select a substrate, in Command WorkStation, select a job and click Properties > Media, and then select an entryfrom the Substrate Catalog.Each Substrate Catalog entry is associated with a specific output profile. When you create a new Substrate Catalogentry, you can associate the Substrate Catalog entry with either an existing profile or create a new profile.

Note: The terms "media" or "paper" refer to "substrate".

Access levels

The level of Substrate Catalog functionality available to you depends on how you log into Command WorkStation.The relevant access levels are:

• Administrator - Has full access to all Command WorkStation and Fiery server functions. Administratorpassword is required.

• Operator - Has access to all Job Center functions. In Device Center, does not have access to Configure, Backupand Restore, changing passwords, and deleting the Job Log. Can view Substrate Catalog, virtual printers, andcolor management functions, but cannot edit them. Operator password is required.

Substrate Catalog allows Administrators to:

• Define multiple substrate attribute combinations and assign unique names to each combination

• Assign color profiles for each substrate

• Select predefined substrate when they submit their job

• Specify which Substrate Catalog columns are available for users

• Centrally maintain their Substrate Catalog database

Substrate Catalog allows Operators to:

• Select predefined substrate when they submit their job


Substrate Catalog

136

Access Substrate Catalog

An Administrator creates Substrate Catalog entries that describe all the substrates available for use with the press.Administrators can access setup options for Substrate Catalog to customize it for specific print shop scenarios.If a job restored from an archive contains a Substrate Catalog entry that is not in the database, Substrate Catalogautomatically creates a new entry with the archive attributes.

1 Log into the desired Fiery server as Administrator. Enter the Administrator password if one has been set.


• Click the Substrate Catalog icon in the Job Center toolbar. If the Substrate Catalog icon is not displayed, do thefollowing:

• If the Substrate Catalog icon is not displayed in the Job Center toolbar, right-click the toolbar, clickCustomize and add Substrate Catalog to the Available Tools list.

• If the Substrate Catalog icon is hidden from view in the Job Center toolbar, either enlarge the window oralternatively, click the More icon (three vertical dots), then click Substrate Catalog.

• Click Substrate Catalog in the Server menu.

• Right-click the Fiery server in the Servers list and select Substrate Catalog.

• Right-click the Fiery server in the Servers list and select Device Center. In Device Center, click the Resourcestab and select Substrate Catalog.

In the Substrate Catalog window, you can create new entries, edit entries, and manage the Substrate Catalogdatabase.

Substrate Catalog window

View substrates organized in different ways.The default view of the Substrate Catalog window displays the names of all media in the catalog. As you clickthrough the names, the following attributes are displayed for the selected name:

Note: Attribute names may vary depending on what is supported on your Fiery server.

• Name of the substrate catalog entry

• Description

• Thickness

• Type

• Size ID

• Dimensions

• Grain direction

• Product ID

The List View (select the check box to display) lets you choose to display all media or all the media of a selected size.The information for each media displayed is dictated by the column headings you have selected.


Substrate Catalog

137

Change the column display in Substrate Catalog

The column headings in the Substrate Catalog window change dynamically, according to whether you are using PPDbased media attributes or JDF based media attributes.Administrators can change the order of these columns in the display, or add/delete the columns to presentinformation useful to your particular print environment. To adjust the width of a column, drag the column border tothe left or right.

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, select the List View check box and right-click in the column heading bar.


• Click Add to choose an item from the menu to add to the columns.

• Click Delete to remove a column.

• Click Move Left or Move Right to move a column in the desired direction.

Choose Substrate Catalog settings

When creating a Substrate Catalog entry, Administrators can choose from two sets of media attributes: Printer(PPD) based and JDF (Job Definition Format).

• The PPD set of media attributes is specific to the Fiery server. The name of each setting is standard acrossdevices, but the list of possible options varies. The PPD set is recommended for new and intermediate users.

• The JDF set of media attributes comes from the printing industry standard specifications for Job DefinitionFormat. This set of media attributes is not specific to the Fiery server, and allows for smooth mapping of mediadefinitions from MIS-job submission workflows. The JDF set is recommended for advanced users familiar withthe JDF workflow.

Note: The Fiery server must support JDF printing and the feature must be enabled in Configure > JobSubmission > JDF Settings > Enable JDF.

Some of the media attributes are common to both sets, although the naming may be slightly different. The JDF setprovides more granularity.

1 Open Substrate Catalog. For more information, see Access Substrate Catalog on page 137.

2 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Settings in the toolbar.

3 Select either PPD based or JDF based for Specification to use and click Close.

Attributes for new entries in Substrate Catalog

Attributes for new Substrate Catalog entries are grouped under different tabs.Before creating a new entry, choose either PPD or JDF settings. For information, see Choose Substrate Catalogsettings on page 138.


Substrate Catalog

138

PPD settings

The tabs are:

• General: Choose settings to specify the media to be used.

• Sizes: Edit an existing entry or create new entries. Choose a pre-defined substrate size from the size Catalog.

• Color Settings: Choose the color profiles.

JDF settings

The tabs are:

• General and Other Attributes: Include a number of JDF attributes to describe the media in greater granularity.

Note: The Sizes and Color Settings tabs are common to both PPD and JDF settings.

Create a Substrate Catalog entry

Administrators can specify new media and media attributes in Substrate Catalog.

1 Open Substrate Catalog. For more information, see Access Substrate Catalog on page 137.

2 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Settings in the toolbar and choose either the PPD based or JDF basedsetting.

3 Click Add New in the toolbar.

4 In the New window, specify the attributes.You must make a selection for each setting marked with an asterisk (*).

Define size attributes for Substrate Catalog entries

Administrators can set or modify size-related attributes when creating or editing a Substrate Catalog entry.1 Open Substrate Catalog and do one of the following:

• Click Add New in the toolbar.

• To edit an existing catalog entry, select the entry and click Edit.

2 Click the Sizes tab.

3 Double-click the entry or click Edit.

4 In Size ID field, make sure there is an entry for the size you want to add or edit.

Note: The Size ID is automatically generated by the Fiery server. You can modify the Size ID but must ensurethat the Size ID is unique. An error message notifies you, if you have entered a duplicate Size ID.


Substrate Catalog

139

5 In the Size Catalog drop-down menu, select a size for the Substrate Catalog entry.

Note: If you choose a substrate size from the Size Catalog drop-down menu, the Size ID field will reflect the SizeID assigned to the selected substrate size. You can modify the Size ID, as required.

6 Select the Grain direction.

7 Add a Product ID as required and click OK.In the main Substrate Catalog window, select the Substrate Catalog entry and in the right pane, you can view thesubstrate size that has been added or modified. It is also displayed in the Sizes tab of the Substrate Catalog entry.

Specify color profile settings

Administrators can associate a Substrate Catalog entry with a color output profile.Any default or custom Fiery server output profile appears listed by name as a possible Substrate Catalog attribute.

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Settings in the toolbar.

2 Specify the Substrate Catalog setting as either PPD based or JDF based.


• Click Add New.

• To edit an existing catalog entry, select the entry and click the Edit button.

4 Click the Color Settings tab.Front color profile - Default color profile applied only to the front side of the media. Select from the list of outputprofiles in the drop-down menu. Depending on the job, you can choose either CMYK or CMYK combined withother specified colors, if supported on the Fiery server. You can override this attribute by specifying a differentcolor profile in Job Properties. This attribute appears in both the PPD and JDF settings.Back color profile - Default color profile applied only to the back of the media. Select from the list of outputprofiles in the drop-down menu. Depending on the job, you can choose either CMYK or CMYK combined withother specified colors, if supported on the Fiery server. The Back color profile menu also includes the Same asFront option. You can override this attribute by specifying a different color profile in Job Properties. Thisattribute appears in both the PPD and JDF settings.

5 Click OK.

The new or modified entry appears under Name in the Substrate Catalog window.For more information about output profiles, see Color Printing.

Modify a Substrate Catalog entry

Administrators can edit or delete Substrate Catalog entries, but with a few limitations.You cannot edit or delete a Substrate Catalog entry if the entry is being used by a job, virtual printer, or a preset.


Substrate Catalog

140

Note: If the Substrate Catalog entry is being used, then the Product ID and the Color Profile settings can bemodified, but the entry cannot be deleted.

Edit a Substrate Catalog entry

You can specify media attributes and values for Substrate Catalog entries.1 In the Substrate Catalog window, select the entry that you want to edit, and click Edit or double-click the selected

entry.The Substrate Catalog entry opens in the Edit window.

2 Enter information in the text fields, or click the arrow to display the drop-down menu for that attribute. Choosethe new attribute setting or enter the new attribute value.

3 Click OK to save the changes.

Delete a Substrate Catalog entry

You can delete one or more Substrate Catalog entries in the Substrate Catalog window.

Note: You cannot delete a Substrate Catalog entry if it is being used by a job, virtual printer, or preset.

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, select the Substrate Catalog entry that you want to delete from the list.Use shift-click to select multiple sequential entries, and ctrl-click to select multiple entries that are not sequential.

2 Click Delete.An alert message asks if you want to delete the entry.

3 Click Yes.

Note:

You can also select multiple entries, right-click them, and choose Delete.

Choose media from Substrate Catalog

Substrate Catalog is available from the Job Properties dialog box in Command WorkStation.1 Select a job and do one of the following:





2 In the Job Properties dialog box, click the Media button.


Substrate Catalog

141

3 Select the substrate from the Substrate Catalog drop-down menu.

4 Select the size from the Size ID drop-down menu.

Assign a temporary custom substrate size

A temporary custom size can be assigned to a substrate. You do not have to select any of the pre-defined sizes thatare applied when a Substrate Catalog entry is assigned to the job. When you assign a custom size to a substrate, youdo not have to create a new entry for the custom size in the Size Catalog. A temporary custom size is useful whenyou have a single/limited use of a particular substrate size.







3 Select none defined from the Substrate Catalog drop-down menu.

4 In the Substrate size field, click Custom and specify the custom size dimensions for the substrate.The custom size is displayed in the Substrate size drop-down menu.

Note: Custom size dimensions are temporary and will not reflect in the list of sizes defined in the Size Catalog.

Assign a temporary custom substrate size to a Substrate Catalog entry

A temporary custom size can be assigned to a substrate without having to add the new size to the Size Catalog. Youcan override the Size ID defined by the Substrate Catalog entry and assign a temporary custom size to the substratewithout reprocessing the job. Other media-related attributes defined in the Substrate Catalog entry are retained as is.

Note: To specify a temporary custom size, a Substrate Catalog entry must be assigned to the job.








Substrate Catalog

142

3 From the Substrate Catalog drop-down menu, assign a Substrate Catalog entry to the job.

Note: The Size ID field is enabled when a Substrate Catalog entry is assigned to the job.

4 From the Size ID drop-down menu, select Custom.The User substrate size/Substrate size field is enabled.

Note: The User substrate size/Substrate size field name is displayed depending on what is supported on yourFiery server.

5 In the User substrate size/Substrate size field, click Custom and specify the custom size dimensions for thesubstrate.The custom size dimensions are displayed in the User substrate size/Substrate size drop-down menu.

Note: Custom size dimensions are temporary and will not reflect in the list of sizes defined in the Size Catalog.

Manage the Substrate Catalog database

Administrators set up and manage the Substrate Catalog database.When the Substrate Catalog database is set up, you can export it, merge it with another Substrate Catalog database,or reset it to factory defaults.

Export the Substrate Catalog database

Exported databases are saved as .xml files and can be imported back into Substrate Catalog at any time.Before you replace your Substrate Catalog database or reinstall system software, we recommend that you first backup your existing database by exporting it to a remote location. You can choose to export all entries in the database ora subset.

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Export in the toolbar and choose Export All....If you only want to export some of the media entries, you can select multiple entries in the Substrate Catalog andchoose Export Selected.... You can Shift-click to select sequential entries, or Ctrl-click to select nonsequentialentries.

2 Navigate to the location on your computer or network where you want to save the exported database file.

3 Enter a name for the database file; then click Save.

The exported database is saved as an .xml file.

Replace the Substrate Catalog database

Administrators can import a new database and replace the existing Substrate Catalog database.Before you replace your Substrate Catalog database, we recommend that you first archive your existing database byexporting it.


Substrate Catalog

143

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Import in the toolbar and choose Replace Existing....

2 Navigate to the replacement database .xml file on your computer or network, and click Open.

3 Click Yes in response to the alert message.

Merge Substrate Catalog databases

Administrators can import entries from another database to create a merged Substrate Catalog database.If the imported database contains an entry that has identical attributes as an entry in the original database, the newentry is not imported and the original entry remains intact in the merged database.

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Import in the toolbar and choose Merge with Existing....

2 Navigate to the database .xml file on your computer or network that you want to import, and click Open.

Your current Substrate Catalog database is now merged with the one you just selected.

Note: When you merge databases, all color profile associations in the imported database are discarded.Repeat the process for additional Substrate Catalog databases that you want to merge into the existing one.

Reset the Substrate Catalog to factory defaults

Administrators can revert the Substrate Catalog database to its factory default.Any added or edited catalog entries are lost when you reset the Substrate Catalog to factory defaults. To save yourcustomized entries, first export your existing catalog database before you reset it to factory defaults.

1 In the Substrate Catalog window, click Reset to Factory in the toolbar.

Note: If the Reset to Factory icon is hidden from view in the Substrate Catalog toolbar, either enlarge theSubstrate Catalog window or alternatively, click the More icon (three vertical dots), then click Reset to Factory.



Substrate Catalog

144

Substrate entries

When you create or edit a Substrate Catalog entry, you can select from a number of substrate attributes. To setsubstrate attributes for a catalog entry, use the main Substrate Catalog window or the Edit window.Mandatory attributes appear with an asterisk (*) next to the name. You cannot leave the field for a mandatoryattribute empty.Substrate Catalog offers you two sets of substrate attributes:

• Printer (PPD) basedThe choices listed for each PPD setting are determined by the PPD for the connected Fiery server.

• JDF (Job Definition Format)JDF attributes are standard and are not dependent on the connected Fiery server.

Common media attributes

Attribute names appear in the column headers of the Substrate Catalog window, according to whether you haveselected PPD based or JDF based settings.JDF attributes are described below. Equivalent PPD settings are also included. The PPD attributes provided to createa Substrate Catalog entry vary from project to project, so the terminology for the attributes will vary. For adescription of the PPD settings available for your product, see Printing.

Note: In the descriptions of the attributes, the terms "media" or "paper" refer to "substrate".

% recycled content The percentage of recycled material in the media.

Back Settings that can be applied to the back of the media. See Back on page 148.You can clear the Same as Front check box and select from the Coating,Gloss value, and the Imageable sides options.

Back color profile Default color profile applied only to the back side of the media. Thisattribute can be overridden by specifying a different color profile in JobProperties. This attribute appears in both the PPD and JDF settings.

Brightness Light reflectance of the media used. Enter a value from 0% (low reflectance)to 100% (high reflectance).

CIE Lab Color The device-independent color of the media. Specify the color using CIEL*a*b* values.


Substrate entries

145

CIE Tint Describes how neutral, unsaturated, or non-chromatic the media is. Specifythe media tint using values in the CIE xyz coordinate system. A coordinateof 0 indicates a perfectly neutral tint in the red-green axis.

CIE Whiteness Describes the amount of overall light reflected by the media, as measuredacross the entire visible spectrum. Specify the reflection amount usingvalues in the CIE xyz coordinate system. A coordinate of (100, 100, 100)indicates perfect whiteness.

Color name Color of the media used. To indicate translucent media, choose a "Clear"color option.

Custom color name Custom color of the media used. If your desired color does not appear in theColor menu, type the name of your custom color into this field.

Description Descriptive information that would enable a user to order more of thismedia.

Dimensions Displays the dimensions of the media used.

Grain direction Specifies the direction of the fluted substrate as it feeds into the printhead.Choose from the following options:

• None - This is the default.

• Short - The short edge of the fluted substrate as it feeds into theprinthead.

• Long - The long edge of the fluted substrate as it feeds into theprinthead.

Front: Settings that can be applied to the front of the media. See Front on page147.

Front color profile Default color profile applied only to the front side of the media. Thisattribute can be overridden by specifying a different color profile in JobProperties. This attribute appears in both the PPD based and JDF basedsettings.

Grade Indicates the surface quality of the media, expressed as a grade level from 1to 5. See Grade on page 148.

Media unit Indicates the physical format of the media that is fed into the printer. See Media unit on page 149.

Name Descriptive name for the catalog entry to describe the media. Type thedesired name into this field.

Pre-Printed When the check box is selected, the media contains pre-printed content.When the check box is cleared, the media is not pre-printed.


Substrate entries

146

Printing technology Choose from the available printing technologies.

• Offset: Uses metal plates to transfer (offset) images to a rubber mediumor rollers which is then printed on the substrate.

• Laser: Uses light or a "laser" to transfer text and images on to thesubstrate. This type of printing uses toner or dry ink powder to print onthe substrate.

• Inkjet: Prints by releasing droplets of ink through the nozzles of theprinter.

Product ID Part number, item code, article number, or other identifier for the mediaused, as defined manually by the print operator, or by a ManagementInformation System (MIS).

Size Catalog List of available pre-defined sizes of the media.

Size ID Indicates the size of the media selected from the Size Catalog. The Size ID isautomatically generated by the Fiery server.

Texture The Texture attribute indicates the surface texture of the media used. See Texture on page 149.

Thickness Thickness of the media used, measured in microns (µm).

Type Describes the stock type of the media used. Choose from the followingoptions:

• Paper - Standard fiber-based paper stock.

• Transparency - Transparent media stock designed to be viewed throughprojection.

Type (PPD based) Describes the stock type of the media used. The list of options includedifferent types of media that can be used depending on the type of job.

Type details The Type details attribute describes additional details of the media stocktype used. See Type details on page 150.

Weight The Weight attribute indicates the weight of the media used, measured ingrams per square meter (gsm) or pounds (lbs). See Weight on page 151.

Front

The Front pane has the following attributes that can be applied to the front of the media.Choose from the following options:

Coating The type of pre-process coating applied to the front side of the media sheet.See Coating on page 148.

Gloss value The percentage of light reflected by the front side of the media when it isviewed under illumination with a 75-degree angle of incidence. A higherpercentage of reflection indicates a higher gloss value.


Substrate entries

147

Imageable sides Specifies which side of the media supports print imaging.

Back

The Back pane has the following attributes that can be applied to the back of the media.

Same as Front Replicates the settings selected in the Front pane. See Front on page 147.

Coating Indicates the type of pre-process coating applied to the back side of themedia sheet. See Coating on page 148.

Gloss value The percentage of light reflected by the back side of the media when it isviewed under illumination with a 75-degree angle of incidence. A higherpercentage of reflection indicates a higher gloss value.

Imageable sides Specifies which side of the media supports print imaging.

Coating

The Coating attribute indicates the type of surface coating to be used for the media.Choose from the following options:

None No coating applied.

Coated Uses a surface sealant to render qualities to the media such as surface gloss,smoothness, and weight.

Glossy Coating that has a high level of sheen and is very reflective.

High gloss Glossiest of all coatings rendering a mirror-like finish. This coating is veryreflective and renders a sharp resolution.

Matte Non-glossy with very little sheen; also known as "flat". This coating mayslightly increase the thickness of the media.

Satin Possesses a lower gloss level than a gloss coating but a higher gloss level thana matte coating. Colors appear sharp and vivid on the media.

Semi-gloss The gloss level can be placed roughly in the middle between a gloss andmatte coating. This coating renders a sharp resolution.

Grade

The Grade attribute indicates the surface quality of the media, expressed as a grade level from 1 to 5.

Note: This attribute is not usually used for media used in digital printing.


Substrate entries

148

If required, use the following guidelines:

1 Gloss-coated paper

2 Matte-coated paper

3 Gloss-coated, web paper

4 Uncoated, white paper

5 Uncoated, yellowish paper

Media unit

The Media unit attribute indicates the physical format of the media that is fed into the press or the printer.Choose from the following options:

Sheet Individually cut sheets.

Roll Media that is continuously connected and wrapped around a spindle.

Continuous Media that is continuously connected and folded, as in a fan-folded format.

Texture

The Texture attribute indicates the surface texture of the media used.

Choose from the following options:

Antique Surface that is rougher than Vellum.

Calendared Extra-smooth or polished uncoated paper.

Cockle Surface that has a rough, wrinkled, irregular finish.

Dull Machine-worn finish without gloss or luster.

Eggshell Surface that has a texture similar to that of an eggshell.

Embossed Linen Surface resembling coarse woven cloth, with a pronounced embossedtexture.

English Surface that is smoother than Machine Finished, but rougher than Supercalendared.

Felt Finish applied by a special marking felt.

Laid Surface with a pattern of vertical and horizontal lines.


Substrate entries

149

Light Cockle Surface that has a rough, wrinkled, irregular finish, with less pronouncedwrinkles than in Cockle.

Linen Surface that has the texture of coarse woven cloth.

Luster Shiny surface.

Machine Finished Extra-smooth or polished uncoated paper, rougher than English.

Matte Dull finish without gloss or luster.

Mottled Finish that shows diverse spots or blotches.

Parchment Finish that resembles the appearance of parchment paper.

Satin Smooth, dull finish that resembles satin fabric.

Semi-vellum Slightly rough finish, smoother than Vellum.

Silk Smooth, dull finish that resembles silk fabric.

Smooth Surface that has a smooth finish.

Stipple Fine, pebbled finish.

Suede Smooth, dull finish that resembles suede fabric.

Super calendared Smoothest, most polished, uncoated paper.

Super smooth Very flat and even finish. Smoother than Ultra smooth.

Traditional laid Surface with a heavier pattern of vertical and horizontal lines than Laid.

Ultra smooth Very flat and even finish, but not as smooth as Super smooth.

Uncalendared Rough, unpolished, and uncoated finish.

Vellum Slightly rough and dull finish.

Velvet Smooth, dull finish that resembles velvet fabric.

Wove Soft, smooth finish.

Type details

The Type details attribute describes additional details of the media stock type used.Choose from the following options:

Plain Choose this option if your media stock does not require a specialdescription. Some systems require a value of plain, but leaving this blank ifthe detail is not needed would be better, if the print engine allows it.

Cardboard Media made from cardboard stock.


Substrate entries

150

Continuous long Opaque media composed of sheets continuously connected along the longedge, as defined by Size.

Continuous short Opaque media composed of sheets continuously connected along the shortedge, as defined by Size.

Labels Adhesive label stock, such as a sheet of peel-off labels.

Weight

The Weight attribute indicates the weight of the media used, measured in grams per square meter (gsm) or pounds(lbs).The basis weights of most North American stock types are measured in pounds (lbs). To convert to gsm, multiplythe basis weight by the appropriate conversion factor.For example, the metric weight of a 50lb bond stock is calculated as follows:Basis Weight x Conversion Factor = 50 x 3.76 = 188gsm.The appropriate conversion factor for stock types is listed in the following table:

Stock type Conversion factor

Bond 3.76

Ledger 3.76

Thin (manifold, onion skin) 3.76

Duplicator 3.76

Safety 3.76

Uncoated book 1.48

Coated book 1.48

Text book 1.48

Cover Papers 2.70

Index bristol 1.81

Tagboard 1.63

Blanks 2.28


Substrate entries

151

Stock type Conversion factor

Printing bristol 2.19

Wedding bristol 2.19

Blotter 3.08

Label 1.48

Newsprint 1.63


Substrate entries

152

Size Catalog

The Size Catalog enables users to create a list of frequently used custom sizes. The Size Catalog is stored on the Fieryserver. Creating a Size Catalog reduces the chance of error from having to specify the size dimensions for thesubstrate for every job.

Note: To manage the Size Catalog, you must log in to Command WorkStation with Administrator access.

Accessing Size Catalog from Fiery Command WorkStation

You can access the Size Catalog from Fiery Command WorkStation > Device Center > Size Catalog.1 Access Device Center in any of the following ways:

• Right-click the Fiery server in the Servers list and select Device Center.

• Double-click the Fiery server in the Servers list.

• Click Device Center on the Fiery Command WorkStation Server menu.

2 In Device Center, click Resources, and then select Size Catalog.

Note: If the Export and Reset to Factory icons are hidden from view in the Size Catalog toolbar, either enlarge theDevice Center window or alternatively, click the More icon (three vertical dots) to view the options for each icon.

Manage the Size Catalog

When you open Size Catalog for the first time, the default Size Catalog entry is listed, displaying the Name andDimensions of the substrate. After setting up the Size Catalog, you can add, modify or delete, publish or unpublish,import or export, and reset the entries to factory defaults.

Create or edit a size catalog entry

You can create or edit Size Catalog entries for frequently-used custom sizes of substrates.

Note: Default Size Catalog entries cannot be edited.


Size Catalog

153

1 In Device Center > Resources > Size Catalog, do one of the following:

• Click the Add New icon to create a Size Catalog entry.

• To edit an existing entry, select the entry and click the Edit icon.

Note: To edit an entry, you can also double-click the entry or right-click the entry and select Edit.

2 In the Add or Edit window, specify or modify the name and dimensions for the entry.Note the following:

• Each Size Catalog entry must have a unique name. Two Size Catalog entries cannot share the same name.

• Multiple Size Catalog entries can have the same dimensions as long as the name of each Size Catalog entry isunique.

• The default unit of measurement for the dimensions of the Size Catalog entry can be set from CommandWorkStation > Edit > Preferences > Region > Measurement units.

• The width of the Size Catalog entry denotes the leading/feed/gripper edge of the substrate.

3 Click OK.

The new or modified entry is listed in the Size Catalog.

Note: Default Size Catalog entries may vary depending on the capabilities of the press.

Delete a size catalog entry

You can delete one or more size catalog entries from the Size Catalog.

Note: Default size catalog entries cannot be deleted.

1 In Device Center > Resources > Size Catalog, select one or more entries that you want to delete.Use shift-click to select multiple sequential entries, and ctrl-click to select multiple entries that are not sequential.

2 Do any one of the following:

• Right-click the entries and select Delete.

• Click the Delete icon in the toolbar.

An alert message asks if you want to delete the entry.

3 Click Yes.The selected entry or entries are deleted from the Size Catalog.

Unpublish or publish size catalog entries

By default, all size catalog entries are visible and can be selected for a job by users; in other words, they are"published."


Size Catalog

154

You can choose to unpublish an entry listed in the Size Catalog. When a size catalog entry is unpublished, the entryis made unavailable in the list of size catalog entries. Additionally, the unpublished size catalog entry cannot beselected by the user when specyfing a substrate size. In Size Catalog, you can select the Hide Unpublished entriescheck box to hide unpublished entries.When an entry, or entries, have been unpublished, you can always publish them again.

1 In Device Center > Resources > Size Catalog, select the entry or entries you want to publish or unpublish.Use shift-click to select multiple sequential entries, and ctrl-click to select multiple entries that are not sequential.


• To unpublish an entry, click the Unpublish icon in the toolbar.

• To publish an entry, click the Publish icon in the toolbar.

Note: You can also right-click a size catalog entry, or entries, and choose Unpublish or Publish.

Import size catalog entries

You can import previously created size catalog entries to add to the existing Size Catalog.During import, if a duplicate Size Name with different dimensions is encountered, a suffix such as "_1, _2, ..." isadded to the size name while retaining the dimensions.

1 In Device Center > Resources > Size Catalog, click the Import icon in the toolbar.

2 Navigate to the .json file on your computer or network that you want to import, and click Open.The .json file is imported and listed in the Size Catalog. If the .json file contained multiple size catalog entries,each size catalog entry is listed separately.

Repeat the process for additional size catalog entries that you want to add to the existing Size Catalog.

Export Size Catalog entries

Exported Size Catalog entries are saved as .json files and can be imported back into the Size Catalog at any time.You can choose to export all or selected entries in the Size Catalog. Both published and unpublished size catalogentries can be exported.

1 In Device Center > Resources > Size Catalog, click the Export icon in the toolbar and select Export All....If you only want to export some of the Size Catalog entries, you can select multiple entries and choose ExportSelected..... Use Shift-click to select sequential entries, or Ctrl-click to select nonsequential entries.

2 Navigate to the location on your computer or network where you want to save the exported Size Catalog entries.

3 Enter a name for the exported entry or entries; then click Save.The exported Size Catalog entries are saved as a .json file.

Note: If you have selected multiple Size Catalog entries or used the Export All... option, a single .json file is created tosave the exported Size Catalog entries.


Size Catalog

155

Reset the Size Catalog to factory defaults

Reset to Factory defaults allows you to revert the Size Catalog to the factory default entries and attributes.Any added or edited size catalog entries are lost when you reset the Size Catalog to factory defaults, unless they havebeen assigned to a job. To save your customized entries, first export your existing size catalog before you reset it tofactory defaults.

1 Open Device Center > Resources > Size Catalog, and click Reset to Factory in the toolbar.



Size Catalog

156

Graphic arts tools

Fiery graphic arts features

Some graphic arts features of the Fiery server are available through feature packages. To determine which packagesare supported by your Fiery server, see the documentation that accompanies your Fiery server.

• Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition on page 157

Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition

Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is a feature package for the Fiery server. If this package is installed onthe Fiery server, the following features are available in Command WorkStation:

• Control Bar on page 157

• Trapping on page 160 (configurable)

• Paper simulation white point editing on page 162

• Preflight on page 163

• Fiery ImageViewer on page 165

Note: The Progressives option is no longer available through Device Center or Job Properties. But you can set up andprint progressives through Fiery ImageViewer. See Progressives on page 162.The following features of Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition are not part of Command WorkStation:

• Hot Folders filters

• Ugra/Fogra Media Wedge

• Integrated Altona Visual Test

Control Bar

If the Control Bar feature is supported by your Fiery server, you can add a control bar (containing a static color barand dynamic job information) to each printed page at a user-defined location.This is useful for proofing and checking the color accuracy of a job. You can use a control bar, in conjunction withanalytical tools such as Fiery Color Profiler Suite, to evaluate color quality.You can turn on a control bar for an individual job or you can set a server default to print a control bar for all jobs.


Graphic arts tools

157

You can edit a control bar or create a new one. Since a control bar does not become a part of a job, a job printed witha control bar can print differently later if the control bar definition has changed.Control Bar is supported for PostScript and PDF jobs.The factory-supplied control bar (called Fiery) and any custom control bars that you create can be applied to anypage size. The Control Bar print option lets you select which control bar, if any, to use for a job. In addition, whenyou edit a control bar definition, a preview shows how the control bar will appear on a specified page size.

Print a control bar by default

You can set a server default to print a control bar for all jobs in Fiery system software later than FS200/200 Pro.

1 Click the More icon (three dots) and select Set Defaults.

2 In the Default settings window, select Job Info.

3 Scroll down to Reporting and select a menu option for Control Bar.The Fiery server comes supplied with a factory default control bar called 'Fiery'. You can create custom controlbars.

4 Choose from the following:

• Off: No control bar is printed.

• Fiery: The factory default control bar is printed.

• Custom control bars: All custom control bars are listed. The selected one is printed.

You can choose to lock the Control Bar setting so users cannot override it.

Note: The factory default is Off. To reset job properties to the factory defaults, click Reset in the Default settingswindow.

View and edit a control bar

You can view the definition of a control bar and edit the settings.1 In Device Center, click Control Bar under Color Setup.

2 Select the control bar in the list and view the definition on the right side of the window.

3 To change settings, click Edit and define the values for each option.

• Control bar name - The name used to select the control bar.

Note: In the printer driver, this name appears only if Two-Way Communication is enabled.

• Color Bar - Lets you turn the display of the color bar on or off, select one of several factory-supplied images orimport your custom image (EPS or PDF format), and specify the placement of the image.

Note: For an image in PDF format, only the first page is used.


Graphic arts tools

158

• Job Information - Lets you turn the display of the job information on or off, select the job settings to display,and specify the appearance and placement of the text.

Note: The available job settings depend on the model of Fiery server.

• Page Settings - Lets you select the preview page size, specify margins (the color bar and job information areplaced inside these margins), and select mirror image (for transparent media).

4 Click OK to save your edits.

Create a custom or duplicate control bar

You can duplicate a control bar to create a custom control bar that fits your needs, or you can create a completelynew control bar. For example, create a control bar that uses a different EPS file as the color bar image.1 In Device Center, click Control Bar under Color Setup.

2 Do one of the following

• To duplicate a control bar, select the control bar and click Duplicate.

• To create a custom control bar, click Create New.

3 Define the values for each option.For more information, see View and edit a control bar on page 158

4 Click OK to save the control bar.

Export, import, or delete a custom control bar

You can export a custom control bar from the Fiery server to your computer as a file and share the local copy orimport it to another Fiery server. Imported control bars are immediately enabled for use on the Fiery server.

Note: You can delete a custom control bar but you cannot delete the factory-supplied control bar.A control bar created on a Fiery server with FS200/200 Pro software cannot be imported to a Fiery server with anearlier version of software, and vice versa.If an exported control bar contains any features that are not supported on the Fiery server to which it is imported(for example, job settings specific to the Fiery server), those features are hidden.

1 In Device Center, click Control Bar under Color Setup.


• To export a control bar, select the control bar, click Export, browse to the location where you want to save thefile, and click Select Folder.

• To import a control bar, click Import, locate and select the control bar file, and click Open.

3 To delete a custom control bar, select the control bar, click Delete, and then click Yes to confirm.


Graphic arts tools

159

Restore the factory default control bar settings

You can restore the factory-supplied control bar to its original (factory default) state.The following procedure is for Fiery system software FS200/200 Pro and earlier.

1 In Device Center, click Control Bar under Color Setup.

2 Select a control bar and click Edit.

3 Click Reset to factory and click Reset.

Trapping

Trapping is a technique to prevent white edges around objects, or “halos,” caused by the misalignment of colorplates. With trapping, objects are printed with slightly enlarged edges, or traps, to fill any gaps between objects.Trapping is applied to a job when the Auto trapping print option is enabled.If configurable Auto Trapping is supported by your Fiery server, you have full control over the trapping settings usedby the Auto trapping print option. The factory default settings of the Fiery server are optimized for the printer usingregular paper. Many jobs print satisfactorily with the default trapping settings, but if they do not provide the resultsnecessary for the media that you use, configure the trapping settings to meet your requirements. You can alwaysrestore the trapping settings to the factory default by clicking the Factory Defaults button in the Trapping pane inDevice Center.

Note: You must be logged in as Administrator to configure trapping settings. Operators can view trapping settingsbut cannot make changes.For more information about trapping, see Color Printing, which is part of the user documentation set.

Set default auto trapping for all jobs

Selecting the Auto trapping check box in the Default settings window applies trapping to all jobs sent to the Fieryserver.1 Click the More icon (three dots) and select Set Defaults.

2 In the Default settings window, select Color.

3 Scroll down to Color settings and select Auto trapping.You can choose to lock the setting to prevent users overriding it in Job Properties.

Specify the trap width

Trap width values determine how thick the trapped area between objects is. You specify the width values relative tothe paper feed direction: horizontal is perpendicular to the feed direction and vertical is parallel to the feed direction.1 In Device Center, click Trapping under Color Setup.


Graphic arts tools

160

2 For Trap width, specify the horizontal and vertical widths. Or, if you want to force the values to be equal, selectthe link icon displayed between the horizontal and vertical values. If the values are different when you select thelink icon, the higher of the two values is used for both.

• Horizontal - Defines the horizontal thickness of the trapped areas (0-10 pixels).

• Vertical - Defines the vertical thickness of the trapped areas (0-10 pixels).

The bitmap image provides a dynamic visual example of the selected values.

Specify trap color reduction

Trap color reduction values determine how much of each color is applied in the trap. The trap between two objectsof different colors can create a line of a third color that is a combination of the two colors. You can reduce theappearance of this line using Trap color reduction.The values you specify are the percent reduction of the toner. A 100% reduction results in no toner intensity appliedto the trap. A 0% reduction results in the same toner intensity as the object edge.

1 In Device Center, click Trapping under Color Setup.

2 Under Trap color reduction, specify the values for the color channels:

• Cyan - Defines the trap reduction in cyan (0-100%).

• Magenta - Defines the trap reduction in magenta (0-100%).

• Yellow - Defines the trap reduction in yellow (0-100%).

• Black - Defines the trap reduction in black (0-100%).

3 (Optional) If you want to force all the reduction values to be the same, select the link icon displayed between thetrap reduction values. If the values are different when you select the link icon, the highest value is used for allvalues.

The icon to the left of each color provides a visual example of the selected value.

Specify trap shape

Trap shape represents how a single pixel appears when trapped against a contrasting background. With elementsbigger than one pixel, the shape, or part of the shape, is only visible at the corners of objects.1 In Device Center, click Trapping under Color Setup.

2 Under Trap shape, select either Ellipse, Diamond, or Rectangle.

Specify trap object types

When you do not select an option for Trap object types, only the trapping of objects (text and graphics) againstobjects is applied. To apply trapping to images, use the settings under Trap object types.1 In Device Center, click Trapping under Color Setup.


Graphic arts tools

161

2 Under Trap object types, select any of the following:

• Trap Objects to Images - Trapping is applied to boundary areas between objects and images.

• Trap Images Internally - Trapping is applied to every individual pixel of an image. This option is available onlywhen you select Trap Objects to Images.

Progressives

The term “progressives” refers to printing any combination of the C, M, Y, and K separations in a multi-colordocument. Printing or proofing the separations can be used to diagnose problems in a job.You cannot set up or print progressives in either Device Center or in Job Properties. However, you can perform asimilar operation by using ImageViewer to view and print separations. By flattening the curve for a specific colorant,you can save it as a preset. For information, see Fiery ImageViewer on page 165.The sequence for printing progressives does not have to represent the actual sequence applied by the printer. Adifferent sequence may be useful for analyzing the image composition.With progressives, you can see the influence of trapping, check the halftone interaction between two colorants, verifyregistration of two plates relative to each other, and see the color separation parameters (making it easy, for example,to visualize the GCR level when only the black plate, or all but the black plate are printed).Progressives show the color separations used by the job when printed to the printer. They are not intended to beused to proof for another printer.

Paper simulation white point editing

The Paper Simulation feature renders paper white as a printed color in the output, rather than leaving white areas ofthe page unprinted. White point editing allows you to adjust the hue, brightness, and saturation of the simulatedpaper white, which is defined in a CMYK source profile as the white point.If Paper Simulation with white point editing is supported by your Fiery server, you can customize the white point ifnecessary to achieve the result that you want.

Note: If you have defined a substitute color as C=0, M=0, Y=0, K=0, the values defined in Substitute Colors overridethose for Paper Simulation.

Edit Paper Simulation white point values

The Paper Simulation white point editing feature lets you customize an existing CMYK source profile and adjust itswhite point. You must also link the custom profile with a specific output profile. When you print a job, you mustselect the customized CMYK source profile and its linked output profile to see the effect of the Paper SimulationWhite Point editing.If you want to preserve the existing CMYK source profile, make a copy of it before editing the white point. You cancopy a profile by exporting it and then importing it with a different name.

Note: You can edit the white point of a CMYK source profile but not an output profile.


Graphic arts tools

162

If you have a spectrophotometer (such as an ES-2000), you can import measured color values directly. This featureallows you to target a match based on the actual color of the paper. To use a spectrophotometer, install and set upthe spectrophotometer before you begin editing the white point.

Note: To use an X-Rite i1Pro 2, you must use an instrument obtained from EFI.

1 In Device Center, click Resources > Profiles.

2 Select a CMYK source profile to customize and click Paper Simulation.

3 Select the output profile to link with this CMYK source profile and click OK.

Note: When you print a job with the custom profile, you must select the same output profile.

4 Make sure that the correct monitor profile for your monitor is displayed under Monitor Profile.To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor according to the manufacturer’srecommendations and specify the correct monitor profile for your monitor.

5 To measure a new white point using a spectrophotometer, click the spectrophotometer icon.

6 Place the spectrophotometer in its calibration cradle and click Calibrate. Calibration improves the accuracy ofmeasurements.

7 Place the spectrophotometer over the target color, making sure to center the sample aperture over the color.

8 Press the button on the spectrophotometer to take the measurement. The measured CMYK values are importedinto the CMYK fields, and the corresponding Lab values are displayed.

9 Alternatively, or additionally, you can edit the hue, brightness, and saturation values manually.

• Hue - 0.0 to 359.9

• Brightness - 0.0 to 100.0 (inclusive)

• Saturation - 0.0 to 100.0 (inclusive)Edit the values by dragging the sliders or typing values in the text fields. The sliders do not show absolutevalues. The slider position and associated values are relative to the paper white definition in effect when youopen the dialog box. View the changes in the preview patch in the upper-left corner of the dialog box and inthe Lab values displayed on the right.

10 To print a test page, click Print.

11 If the test page looks correct, click Save and close the Paper Simulation White Point dialog box.

Preflight

You can use the Preflight feature to check a job before printing, to reduce costly printing errors. Preflight checks themost common areas of error to ensure that a job will print successfully and to the expected quality on the selectedprinter.Preflight generates a report of errors as well as information about the job, including security settings, page size, andcolor spaces.Preflight checking can be enabled in Hot Folders and Virtual Printers as well as in Command WorkStation.

Note: Processed jobs cannot be checked with Preflight.


Graphic arts tools

163

The following file formats are supported for Preflight: PostScript, PDF, EPS, PPML, Creo VPS, and PDF/VT.TIFF and PCL file formats are not supported for Preflight.Preflight can check for the following categories of errors:

• Fonts - Checks for missing fonts and Courier font substitution.

• Spot Colors - Checks for missing spot colors. You can add missing spot colors in Command WorkStation SpotColors.

• Image Resolution - Checks for image resolution less than a specified value.

• VDP Resources - Checks for missing VDP resources. You can specify the number of records to check, to preventa potentially long processing time.

• Hairlines - Checks for line thickness less than a specified value.

• Overprint - Checks for overprint.

• PostScript - Checks for PostScript errors.

You can configure Preflight to specify which categories of errors to check and how errors are reported. Preflightconfiguration settings can be saved as a preset, which allows you to quickly select a Preflight configuration for aparticular job.

Configure and run Preflight check

You can configure Preflight to specify which categories of errors to check and how errors are reported. Preflightconfiguration settings can be saved as a preset, which allows you to quickly select a Preflight configuration for aparticular job.1 In Job Center, select a held job and select Actions > Preflight.

2 Optionally, select a Preset (collection of settings) from the Preset list.

3 Select each category of error to check and specify any settings. Clear the check box to skip a particular category.A skipped category is displayed as Not checked.

4 Select a notification level (Critical or Warning) for each category of error.

5 Select Stop Preflight on first critical error if you want to stop running Preflight as soon as a critical error isdetected.

6 To save the settings as a new preset, select Save As from the Preset list.

7 To perform the Preflight check with these settings, click Preflight.Preflight runs and displays the results in a report. You can print and save this report, and you can also redisplaythe report by right-clicking the job in Job Center and selecting View Preflight Report.


Graphic arts tools

164

Fiery ImageViewer

Fiery ImageViewer allows you to soft proof and edit colors or gray levels (if supported) in a job before printing. Youcan preview orientation, content, general color accuracy, and a preview of a processed job (raster image).

Color output

Fiery ImageViewer displays the job with the actual CMYK values that are sent to the press and therefore provides anaccurate soft proof. The soft proof does not display the effects of calibration, however, which can affect color.You can edit the individual C, M, Y, and K response curves. You can save your edits and apply them to other colorjobs. You can also apply G7 calibration curves that were created using CHROMiX Curve2, Curve3 or Curve4.You can display the separation data for each process color independently or in combination with any other processcolors. If the job has Halftone simulation settings, the preview shows a composite view of all separations at the dotlevel. If you print pages from Fiery ImageViewer, the output includes composite color information for theseparations that are selected in Fiery ImageViewer.

ImageViewer requirements

Command WorkStation includes Fiery ImageViewer version 4.0. This version is used if your computer meets thefollowing requirements.

• GPU running OpenGL version 3.2 and later

• Minimum 750 MB of memory available to the graphics card

Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 is used if your computer does not meet these requirements, or for these types of connections:

• Remote Desktop connection

• Command WorkStation connected to a black-and-white Fiery server

The OpenGL version can be verified with third-party software, such as OpenGL extension viewer.

Start ImageViewer

You can start ImageViewer from a job in Command WorkStation.

1 In Command WorkStation Job Center, select a job that has been processed and held.If needed, select Actions > Process and Hold to move a job to processed/held status.


• Select Actions > ImageViewer.

• Right-click (Windows) or ctrl-click (Mac OS) the selected job, and select ImageViewer from the menu thatappears.


Graphic arts tools

165

Fiery ImageViewer toolbar for quick access to common actions

The Fiery ImageViewer toolbar provides quick access to common actions that can be applied to the job. To show orhide the toolbar, click the ‘t’ key to toggle.Some toolbar icons are available only if the Fiery server supports them.

Button Description

Save The Save button saves the current settings for the job.

Revert The Revert button reverts to the previous settings for the job.

Magnifier (Fiery ImageViewer v4) Zooms in on the image by a fraction.

Wiper (Fiery ImageViewer v4) The Wiper button provides splitscreen on a diagonal, so the user can see the image before andafter adjustments are made. The user can pan the image tomove the split to before or after correction.

To move or swipe the diagonal on the image, click ctrl+alt forWindows and click cmd+opt for macOS and use the wheelon the mouse to spin the diagonal.

Rotate The Rotation button allows you to rotate the Image Previewdisplay in 90-degree increments.

Note: This action does not alter the orientation of the finalprinting output. Rotation is a global setting that affects allpages within the job.

Shrink/Stretch The Shrink/Stretch button toggles between showing theshrinkage or stretch that is applied to the job based on theJob Properties, Substrate tab > Width scaling and Lengthscaling options. The options must be set above or below100% for the Shrink/Stretch icon to appear in FieryImageViewer.

The button is available only for high-speed inkjet presses thatsupport the feature.

Single-sided The icon is shown for a single-sided job, and available onlyfor high-speed inkjet presses that support the feature.


Graphic arts tools

166

Button Description

Double-sided The icon is shown for a double-sided job, and available onlyfor high-speed inkjet presses that support the feature.

Local Correction The Local Correction tool allows you to draw a selection boxanywhere on the image to locally perform color replacement.

The button is available only for the Fiery server that supportsthe Local Color Replacement feature.

Local Color Edit The Local Color Edit icon is shown in the history for localcolor correction.

Page Color Edit The Page Color Edit icon is shown in the history for pagecolor correction.

Soft Proof enabled The Soft Proof button shows when ink limitation is turnedoff and provides an accurate soft proof of the job.

Soft Proof disabled The Soft Proof button shows when ink limitation is turned onand a soft proof cannot be seen. To preview specialty colors,soft proof is disabled.

Adjust the image preview

The Navigator pane controls what appears in the image preview. The area of the image preview can be enlarged to fitthe screen.The bounding box in the Navigator pane contains the part of the image that is visible in the image preview. If thebounding box is hard to see, change its color in Edit > Preferences.

1 To reposition the part of the image that shows in the preview, do one of the following:

• Drag the bounding box in the Navigator pane.

• Drag the image.

• To center the preview on a specific location in the image, hold down the Shift key and click that location.

2 To rotate the image clockwise, do one of the following:

• Choose 90°, 180° or 270° from the list, or click the Rotate ( ) icon.

• Click View > Rotate and click the appropriate selection.

The rotation applies only to the preview, not the printed job.


Graphic arts tools

167

To reset the preview to the original orientation, click View > Rotate > Reset.

3 (For Fiery ImageViewer 4.0) To split the screen on a diagonal to see the image before and after adjustments aremade, click the Wiper icon.The raster area above the diagonal line displays the after effects of an edit and the raster area below the diagonalline displays the before effects without an edit. You can pan the image to move the split to before or aftercorrection. The image moves in the direction that it is dragged.The wiper can be moved around the screen with either ctrl+alt (Windows) or cmd+option (Mac OS) and thescroll wheel on the mouse.

4 To enlarge the area of the image preview, click View > Full Screen.To return to the normal display, press the F key.

Resize the image

In addition to the zoom control at the bottom of the screen, there are several ways to resize the image.1 To zoom in so that each data pixel in the image is displayed as a single pixel on the screen, select View > Actual

Pixels.The monitor resolution setting determines the actual size of the pixel display.

Note: (For Fiery ImageViewer 3.0) If the job has Halftone simulation settings and the zoom is set at 100% orhigher, the halftone dot pattern and shape are displayed. Depending on the frequency of the dot pattern, a dotwill consist of several pixels.

2 To zoom out so that the entire page fits in the image preview, click the Fit in Window icon next to the zoomcontrol or select View > Fit in Window

3 (ImageViewer 3.0) To display a magnified view of the area around the cursor location that moves with the cursor,click the Magnifier icon or select View > Magnifier.

View color values in the image

ImageViewer displays the job with the actual color values that are sent to the press. You can inspect the color valuesof any point in the image.• Hover over a pixel in the image.

The values for each colorant are displayed in the Separations pane.Total Area Coverage reports the sum of the separation % values for the raster pixel being sampled.

Using Object Inspector, you can also see the object type that the pixel in the raster was rendered from. See ObjectInspector on page 169.


Graphic arts tools

168

Object Inspector

Object Inspector shows the object type from which the selected pixel in the raster was rendered.Separation % color values are also displayed for the pixel being sampled. Object types include image, graphics, text,and edge pixels (tagged for edge enhancement). If the pixel being sampled was rendered from the blending ofmultiple page objects, the object type is displayed as an unknown object type.

• To use Object Inspector, move the cursor over the pixel in the Image Preview pane.

Color Replacement

Color replacement allows you to replace colors in the output raster. It works best with solid colors and uniform tints.

Note: The Color Replacement feature is available only in Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 and later.You can enter color tint values to be replaced or can select the original color to replace with the eye dropper. Youcan then enter a color replacement tint value or sample replacement color with the eye dropper. The order of colorreplacements may be changed, and individual replacements can be hidden or deleted.You can zoom in to an area on the image down to a pixel for color replacement.To use the Color Replacement feature, in the Image Preview pane, click and move the eye dropper (color pickericon) over the pixel of the original color in the image, and then move the eye dropper over the pixel of thereplacement color. The large square defines the area that is currently being viewed, while the smaller square is thepixel. Click Apply to save the changes.

Page ( ) and Local ( ) icons show the type of color correction made. The page and local edits are differentiated bya solid line or a dashed line. When an entry is modified, the check box, if applied, is removed because the entry isvalid only for the current page. You can choose to apply the local color edit or page color edit to all pages by selectingthe corresponding All Pages check box.You can save page color replacements as a preset alone or along with curve adjustment presets, and then apply colorreplacement through Command WorkStation, or Fiery Hot Folders with Job Properties. Local color replacementcannot be saved as a preset. If you combine local color replacement with curve adjustment, only the curveadjustment will be saved as a preset.After a correction is applied, up to thirty-one additional color replacements can be applied for a total of thirty-tworeplacements. The order of color replacements may be changed, and individual replacements can be hidden ordeleted. A color that is substituted can be modified later by selecting the color replacements in the history.In ImageViewer 4.2, when you apply any color replacement edit, it will be applicable only to the current page, unlessyou explicitly select the All Pages check box in the History list. The changes are applied during printing of the job.Keep in mind the following:

• Clearing the All Pages check box from any page for any color replacement edit, should delete that specific editfrom all pages except the current page.

• When a Fiery server is connected to a high-speed inkjet press, color replacement will not be shown in Front andBack Overlay mode.

• A maximum of thirty-two color replacements per page can be performed.

• Curve modification is applied after substituting original color. For this reason, always create color replacementsbefore adjusting curves.


Graphic arts tools

169

• Soft Proof PDF does not show the color replacement changes applied in the job.

• For best results, view the raster at 100% in Fiery ImageViewer when applying color replacements. If raster isviewed at less than 100%, anti-aliasing of the raster preview may cause color replacement at edges to lookdistorted. This does not affect the print.

• Color replacement done in the background (paper white areas) will not appear in the printed output.

• Color replacement is only available for jobs processed with the Composite overprint print option selected.

• When the color replacement entry is deleted from any page, it is deleted from all pages in the document, only ifthe color replacement edit (All Pages check box) is selected. If the color replacement edit (All Pages check box) iscleared, then deleting the edit will be applicable only for the current page.

Local Color Replacement

Local color replacement allows you to make color corrections locally to a selected area of the page.

Note: The Local Color Replacement feature is available only in Fiery ImageViewer 4.2 and later.To use Local Color Replacement, do the following:

• Click the Local Correction button ( ) and use the marquee to select an area within the image to apply localcolor correction. The selection area will be shown by a dashed line such that color replacement will be appliedonly to the selected area.

• Use the large square to zoom in to an area on the image down to a pixel (smaller square) for color replacement.

• Click the picker icon for the original color and move to the image to select a color or change the values for thecolor mode, such as CMYK, CMYK+, Grayscale, and CMYK+ Specialty under the Replacement column. Thelarge square used for color enhancement defines the area that is currently being viewed, while the smaller squareis the pixel for the selected color.

Toggle between local color replacement and original color by clicking the eye icon for any of the rows listed in thehistory. If you wish to apply the local color replacement to all pages in the document, click the All Pages check boxfor that specific color replacement. The specified area on all pages in the document will show the same colorreplacement.You can adjust the local color replacement area by clicking the replacement color in one of the rows listed in thehistory, and then adjust the marquee for the specific area.

Front and Back Overlay

The Front and Back Overlay feature allows the preview of imposed sheets.Four imposition styles (Work Style or Printing Method) may be previewed by setting the Overlay option to:Sheetwise, Perfector, Work & Turn, and Work & Tumble.For most perfector preses, if a duplex job is received with duplex turned on, then the only available Front and BackOverlay option setting will be Perfector.For duplex presses, the Front and Back Overlay feature will show either the four manual duplexing choices or theimposition style(s) defined by the Duplex print option in the Job Properties window for the raster image.In all cases, the Front and Back Overlay preview can be disabled by setting the control to Off. The overlay control isfor preview purposes only and does not change the duplex setting of the job.


Graphic arts tools

170

Compare surfaces allows the comparison of any two surfaces in a job.For Display mode, you can adjust the following settings:

• Continuous tone allows you to choose to preview impositions in true color.

• Custom allows you to select a custom color to preview for each front and back imposition.

• Front opacity allows you to adjust the opacity of the front surface so that the back surface can be seen.

• Back opacity allows you to adjust the opacity of the back surface to control visibility in the preview.

Image Position

The Image Position feature allows the placement of raster image of an imposition surface precisely on the printingsustrate in order to allow for mechanical press requirements such as gripper margin and also to have sheets that willwork properly in finishing workflows for folding, cutting, and binding.Fiery ImageViewer allows the you to precisely place jobs on the substrate with numeric offset values or visualpositioning. Fiery ImageViewer shows the edges of the substrate, as well as the boundaries of the printable area onthe substate for the press.The benefits of the Image Position feature are:

• See placement of raster image on the substrate without trial and error.

• See imageable area on the sheet so that the imposition can be moved to the edge of the imageable area or theimposition can be clipped, if desired.

• Accurately position the imposition to allow for the press gripper margin or to produce sheets that are ready forfinishing.

The page border is highlighted in black by default. You can edit the page border (color) in the Preferences window.The imageable area of the substrate is highlighted in green.To use the Image Position feature:

1 Origin - substrate location from which offset is calculated. The choices are Center of substrate, Center ofprintable area, Center of custom printable area, and Bottom center to leading edge.

2 Offset (can be turned on or off) - lets you set X and Y offsets to position the raster image on the substrate. Forduplex presses, back offset control is also available if Front and Back Overlay is not set to Off.

3 Offset unit - set the units that offsets are adjusted in (mm or inches).

4 Align front and back images - locks the alignment of the front and back surface so that the offset of the front isinversely applied to the back.

Keep in mind the following when using the Image Position feature:

• On a duplex press, the back image position controls are only available if Front and Back Overlay is turned on.

• Align front and back images is turned on only if Front and Back Overlay is turned on.


Graphic arts tools

171

Animate ink limit

Fiery ImageViewer helps you to see what pixels in the job are near the total area coverage (TAC) limit and any pixelsthat have been adjusted past the ink limit using Fiery ImageViewer curves or spot color edits.To turn on the animation feature, start Fiery ImageViewer, open a processed and held job, and press ctrl+shift+L.Flashing yellow areas in a job show pixels that are near the total area coverage (TAC) limit.Flashing red areas in a job show pixels that are at or beyond the total area coverage (TAC) limit.The total area coverage limit is loaded from the connected server. The limit can be manually adjusted or overwrittenin the Fiery ImageViewer Preferences by turning on the Ink Limit for Animations option for viewing images only inFiery ImageViewer.

Note: When ink limit animation is turned on, you are not seeing an accurate soft proof. The eye icon at the upperright of the Fiery ImageViewer window turns amber with a diagonal line to show that soft proofing is disabled. Whenanimation is disabled by clicking ctrl+shift+L, the eye icon turns green to show you that soft proofing is turned on.

Note: The Animation ink limit feature is not available for all Fiery servers.

Display and print color separations

The Separations pane controls which color separations are displayed in the image preview and included in printedoutput when you print the job from ImageViewer. Each page in the job may have different separations enabled.• To display color separations, do any of the following:

• To control which separations appear and print, select or clear the check box next to the separation name in theSeparations pane.

Note: Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 will print all separations regardless of whether they are selected in theSeparations pane.

• To invert the current selection of separations, select View > Separations > Invert Selections.Inverting a selection makes unselected separations the new selection. For example, if CMYK separations areavailable and Cyan and Magenta are selected, inverting the selection displays Yellow and Black.

• To quickly display all separations, choose View > Separations > Select All.

ImageViewer Edits

The ImageViewer Edits print option lets you apply color curve edits that have been saved on the server as a preset.ImageViewer in Command WorkStation can be used to edit the CMYK curves of a job on the Fiery server. TheImageViewer Edits option settings are listed in Preset area of the Color Adjust pane. These curve edits can be saved asa preset and applied to other jobs.Use the ImageViewer Edits option to select a preset for your job.


Graphic arts tools

172

Factory-supplied curve edits apply some typical color corrections:

• No correction

• Lighter highlights

• Midtone boost

• Shadow detail

• Reduce C (cyan) cast

• Reduce M (magenta) cast

• Reduce Y (yellow) cast

Edit response using curves

You can edit the response curves in the Color Adjust pane to make precise edits to a job. This feature lets youcustomize the response curve for each color separation in a job.

Note: After you make curve edits for a color job, save the job before you switch to the Color Wheel tab. Otherwise, allof your curve edits are lost.

Edit a curve graphically

1 Click the Curves tab in the Color Adjust pane.

2 If necessary, adjust how the color curves are displayed:

• To show or hide a color curve, click the eye icon below the specific color block.

• To select a specific color curve, click its color block, which brings the curve to the front.

• Use the page up and page down keys to switch between the curves.

3 Do any of the following:

• To add a point on the curve, click anywhere on the curve.

• To edit a curve, drag a point on the curve to the desired response value.

Note: In Windows, you can select a point and use the arrow keys to move the point 1% in any direction, or tomove a large amount, hold down the shift key and press an arrow key.

• To delete a point on a curve, select the point and press Delete.You can also select a point and drag it over the point you want to delete.

• In Windows, move from point to point by selecting one point on the curve and using shift-page up and shift-page down.


Graphic arts tools

173

Edit color curve data

1 Click the Curves tab in the Color Adjust pane and then click Edit Curve.

2 In the table that appears, edit the numeric values.Each row of the table corresponds to an edit point in the graph.

3 Do any of the following:

• To display a predefined set of rows, select the set from the Control Points list.

• To add a row, type in the empty row.

• To delete a row, click anywhere in the row and click Delete Row.

Edit colors using the color wheel

You can edit colors using the color wheel in the Color Adjust pane.

Note: The edits that you make using the color wheel are kept if you switch to the Curves tab. But edits that you makeusing curves are lost if you switch to the Color Wheel tab without first saving the job.

1 Click the Color Wheel tab in the Color Adjust pane.

2 Click a tonal range (Highlights, Overall, or Shadows) to set the tonal range for the edit.

Note: The tonal range selection does not apply to Brightness. Brightness always applies to the entire tonal range.

3 To edit hue and saturation, click a new location inside the color wheel.The image preview changes to show the result of the edit.

4 Fine-tune the edit by dragging the sliders for Hue, Saturation, Black, or Brightness, or type a new numeric value tothe right of the slider.

Apply color edits to one or all pages

You can copy color edits from the current page and paste them to another page or to all pages in a job.

1 Click the Curves tab in the Color Adjust pane, and then click Apply To.

2 Specify the page number(s) and click OK.

Apply color edits through a local file

You can save color edits to a local file on your computer and then import the edits from the file to the current pagein Fiery ImageViewer. The current page may be in the same job or in a different job.

Note: For some types of Fiery server, you can also save color edits as a server preset and apply the preset to adifferent job.


Graphic arts tools

174

Save color edits to file

1 Select File > Export > Color Adjust.

2 Type a name for the file and select a file type.

3 Browse to the location where you want to save the file and save it.

Import color edits from file

1 Select File > Import > Color Adjust.

2 Locate and select the desired color edits file.

3 Click Open.The color edits are applied to the current page.

Apply color edits through a server preset

If your Fiery server supports this feature, you can save color edits as a server preset. With a preset, you can apply thesame color edits to a different job in Fiery ImageViewer, and you can also apply the preset to a held job through thewindow in Command WorkStation, without using Fiery ImageViewer.

Note: You can also save color edits to a local file on your computer and apply them to a different job inImageViewer.

Save color edits as a preset

1 In the Color Adjust pane, make the edits that you want to save.

2 Click the Curves tab and click Preset > Save As.

3 Type a name for the preset and click OK.The preset is added to the list.

Note: Color replacements are available with Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 and are saved in the preset as a globalcorrection. Color replacements cannot be used on a per-page-basis.

Apply color edits through a preset in ImageViewer

1 In the Color Adjust pane, click the Curves tab and select the preset in the Preset list.

2 Click File > Save.The preset is applied to the current job.


Graphic arts tools

175

Apply color edits through a preset in Job Properties

1 In Command WorkStation Job Center, select a held job and click Actions > Properties.

2 Click the Color tab, select the preset in the ImageViewer Curves option, and click OK.

3 With the same job selected, click Actions > Process and Hold.The color edits of the preset are applied to the processed job.

Note: After the job is processed, the color edits are incorporated in the job and no longer appear as edits inImageViewer.

Delete a preset

1 In the Color Adjust pane, select the preset in the Preset list.The preset is applied to the image.

2 In the Preset list, select the custom preset that was applied to the image, and then click Delete. Click Yes toconfirm.The preset is removed from the list and from the image.

Note: If you observe any inconsistent or bad curves that do not apply in Fiery ImageViewer and you are not ableto delete them, as well as Job Properties does not show the full list of curves, then you can resolve it by pressingctrl+shift+D (Windows) or cmd+shift+D (Mac OS) in Fiery ImageViewer. This will internally delete all badcurves and Job Properties will show the full list of curve presets.

Apply color curve from Curve2/Curve3/Curve4 file

You can import a CMYK response curve that was created in CHROMiX Curve2, Curve3 or Curve4 (G7 calibrationsoftware) and exported as a text file. When you import the curve in Fiery ImageViewer, it is applied to the currentpage, replacing the existing response curve.The file can be in standard format or Delta format.

1 Click the Curves tab in the Color Adjust pane, and then click Edit Curve.

2 Click Import Curve, locate and select the file that contains the curve, and click Open.

Print the job with edits

After you make edits to the job, you can print it.The printed page(s) include composite color information for the separations that are selected in the Separationspane. Each page in the job may have different separations enabled.

1 For each page in a job, set the separations in the Separations pane that you want to print.

2 Click File > Save.


Graphic arts tools

176

Export soft proof to PDF

You can save a soft proof in PDF format for viewing at a different time or location. When you export to PDF, you canselected a page range and resolution

Note: The soft proof does not display the effects of calibration, which can affect color, and it does not show the colorreplacement changes applied in the job.The resolution of the soft proof can be different from the resolution of the job, since the soft proof is not intendedfor printing.

1 Click File > Export > Soft Proof PDF.

2 Specify the page range. Use commas to separate page numbers or page ranges.

3 Select the desired resolution.

4 Click OK.

5 Type a name for the file. The file type is always PDF.

6 Browse to the location where you want to save the file, and click Save.

Note: Color replacements, which may be applied with Fiery ImageViewer 4.0, are not shown in Soft Proof PDF.

Compare the monitor profile to the output profile

If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can use Fiery Profile Inspector to view a model of thegamut of your monitor profile compared to the gamut of the output profile specified for the job.This comparison helps you generate an accurate soft proof. It gives you an idea of how the image you see in FieryImageViewer might compare to the printed output.The current monitor profile for the monitor on which Fiery ImageViewer is running will be used. For best results,profile the monitor using Fiery Color Profiler Suite.

Note: (For Fiery ImageViewer 3.0) If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can click Create aMonitor Profile in Fiery ImageViewer Preferences to create a new monitor profile in Fiery Monitor Profiler.

• In Fiery ImageViewer, select View > Compare Monitor Profile with Output Profile.

Set Fiery ImageViewer preferences

For color jobs, you can specify Fiery ImageViewer preferences such as units and monitor profile.The image size (dimensions) and resolution are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or ImageViewer > Preferences (Mac OS).


Graphic arts tools

177

2 Set any of these preferences in the Preferences window:

• Units - Sets the units for displaying the dimensions and resolution.

• 'Clear' Separation Display Settings - If the Fiery server supports a clear varnish separation in addition to C, M,Y, and K separations, use this setting to specify Mask Color and Opacity of the clear separation as shown inFiery ImageViewer.

• Cross Hair Color Picker - Click the color block to select the color of the bounding box in the Navigator pane.

• (For Fiery ImageViewer 3.0) Monitor Profile - Either displays the operating system setting for the monitorprofile or allows you to select the monitor profile. To obtain an accurate soft proof, use a profile that isaccurate for your monitor.If Fiery Color Profiler Suite is installed on your computer, you can click Create a Monitor Profile to create a newmonitor profile in Fiery Monitor Profiler.

• Reset Preferences – Resets the Fiery ImageViewer preference settings back to their default values.

• Image Border – Click the color block to select the color of the border around the page as shown on thesubstrate in the image preview.

• Front – Click the color block to select the color of the border around the document size as shown on thesubstrate in the image preview.

• Non-Imageable Area – Click the color block to select the color of the translucent fill for the non-imageablearea, for example between the imageable area and substrate, as shown on the substrate in the image preview.

• Press Inspection Zone – Click the color block to select the color of the border for the press inspection zoneon the page as shown on the substrate in the image preview.

• Ink Limit for Animations – allows you to manually adjust the value that represents the total ink limit (which thedefault value represents) and highlight pixels that are close to the limit such that an edit made from FieryImageViewer can warn you of the pixels that have exceeded the limit.

• (For Fiery ImageViewer 3.0) Always launch ImageViewer 3- Clear the check box to run Fiery ImageViewer 4.0for future sessions.

• (For Fiery ImageViewer 4.0) Always launch ImageViewer 3 - Select to run Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 in the currentsession and for future sessions.

Changes from Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 to Fiery ImageViewer 4.0

Description of changes between Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 and Fiery ImageViewer 4.0.

1 Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 is based on OpenGL rendering architecture. For this reason, Fiery ImageViewer 4.0requires a video card/GPU that supports OpenGL version 3.2 and above. If this requirement is not met, thenFiery ImageViewer 3.0 will be launched. The OpenGL version can be checked using third party software, such asOpenGL extension viewer.

• For Windows - http://download.cnet.com/OpenGL-Extensions-Viewer/3001-18487_4-34442.html

• For Mac OS - https://itunes.apple.com/in/app/opengl-extensions-viewer/id444052073?mt=

2 Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 is launched if Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 cannot launch due to video card limitations.

3 Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 cannot be launched if you log on to the client computer using Microsoft Remote DesktopConnection. For Remote Desktop Connections, Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 is typically launched.


Graphic arts tools

178

http://download.cnet.com/OpenGL-Extensions-Viewer/3001-18487_4-34442.html

https://itunes.apple.com/in/app/opengl-extensions-viewer/id444052073?mt=

4 Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 can have only five sessions open at a time.

5 Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 shows the raster at the center of the canvas; Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 has the capability ofcentered image panning.

6 The Monitor Profile option and information to download Fiery Color Profiler Suite has been removed from thePreferences window. Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 uses the operating system default profile for the monitor, includingfor multiple monitors.

7 Unfocused area in the Navigator pane is grayed out.

8 The Halftone simulation option is not supported.

9 The Magnifier tool is not supported.

10 Fiery ImageViewer 4.0 is not supported on black-and-white products. Fiery ImageViewer 3.0 will launch instead.


Graphic arts tools

179


Graphic arts tools

180

Fiery Command WorkStationhelp.efi.com/cws_hsij/6.4/en-us/Command_WorkStation.pdfFiery JDF workflow .....74 Submit the JDF job .....74 Display JDF column headings in Command

Documents